copyrightsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...the telephone number to which...

201
COPYRIGHT Fujitsu PC Corporation has made every e ort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. However, as ongoing development e orts are contin- ually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks and LifeBook is a trademark of Fujitsu Limited. Built for Humans and ErgoTrac are trademarks of Fujitsu PC Corporation. The following are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation:IBM, IBM PC AT, IBM PS/2. The following are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation:MS,MS-DOS, Windows 95. PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Phoenix and the Phoenix logo are registered trademarks of Phoenix Technologies,Ltd. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and MMX technolory is a trademark of Intel Corporation. PC-Doctor is a trademark of watergate.software.inc. SoftPEG is a registered trademark of CompuCore Multimedia Inc. LapLink is a registered trademark of Traveling Software Inc. AudioRack is a registered trademark of ESS Technology, Inc. MegaPhone is a registered trademark of AVEO, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. We cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. © Copyright 1998 Fujitsu PC Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu PC Corporation. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu PC Corporation. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name: Fujitsu PC Corporation Address: 598 Gibraltar Drive Milpitas,CA 95035 Telephone: (408) 935-8800 Declares that product: Model:LifeBook 770Tx. LifeBook 790Tx. Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. David Woo Fujitsu 4/17/98

Upload: hoanganh

Post on 14-Mar-2018

216 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

COPYRIGHTFu j i t su PC Corpora ti on has made every effort to en su re the acc u racy and com p l eteness of this doc u m en t .However, as on going devel opm ent efforts are con ti n -u a lly improving the capabi l i ties of our produ ct s , we cannot guara n tee the acc u racy of the con tents of t h i sdoc u m en t . We disclaim liabi l i ty for errors , om i s s i on s ,or futu re ch a n ge s .

Fu j i t su and the Fu j i t su logo are regi s tered tradem a rk sand Life Book is a tradem a rk of Fu j i t su Limited .

Built for Humans and Ergo Trac are tradem a rks ofFu j i t su PC Corpora ti on .

The fo ll owing are regi s tered tradem a rks ofIBM Corpora ti on :I B M , IBM PC AT, IBM PS/2.

The fo ll owing are regi s tered tradem a rks ofMi c ro s oft Corpora ti on :M S ,M S - DO S , Wi n dows 95.

PCMCIA is a tradem a rk of the Pers onal Com p uterMem ory Ca rd In tern a ti onal As s oc i a ti on .

P h oenix and the Phoenix logo are regi s tered tradem a rks of P h oenix Tech n o l ogi e s ,L td .

Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks andMMX technolory is a trademark of Intel Corporation.

P C - Doctor is a tradem a rk of w a ter ga te . s of t w a re . i n c .

Sof t PEG is a regi s tered tradem a rk ofCom p u Core Mu l ti m edia In c .

LapLink is a regi s tered tradem a rk ofTraveling Sof t w a re In c .

Au d i o Rack is a regi s tered tradem a rk ofESS Tech n o l ogy, In c .

Mega P h one is a regi s tered tradem a rk ofAV E O, In c .

All other tradem a rks men ti on ed herein are the property of t h eir re s pective own ers .

We cannot guara n tee the acc u racy of the con tents ofthis doc u m en t . We disclaim liabi l i ty for errors ,om i s s i on s , or futu re ch a n ge s .

© Copyri ght 1998 Fu j i t su PC Corpora ti on . All ri gh t sre s erved . No part of this publ i c a ti on may be cop i ed ,reprodu ced , or tra n s l a ted , wi t h o ut pri or wri t ten con s ent of Fu j i t su PC Corpora ti on . No part of t h i sp u bl i c a ti on may be stored or tra n s m i t ted in any el ectronic form wi t h o ut the wri t ten con s ent ofFu j i t su PC Corpora ti on .

D E C LA RATION OF CONFORMITYaccording to FCC Part 15

Responsible Party Name: Fujitsu PC Corporation

Address: 598 Gibraltar DriveMilpitas,CA 95035

Telephone: (408) 935-8800

Declares that product: Model:LifeBook 770Tx.LifeBook 790Tx.

Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

This devi ce complies with Pa rt 15 of the FCC ru l e s .Opera ti ons is su bj ect to the fo ll owing two con d i ti on s :(1) This devi ce must not be all owed to cause harm f u li n terferen ce , (2) This devi ce must accept any interfer-en ce received , i n cluding interferen ce that may causeu n de s i red opera ti on .

D avid Woo Fu j i t su 4 / 1 7 / 9 8

Page 2: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C A U T I O N

Changes or modification not expressly appro v e dby Fujitsu PC Corporation could void this user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

S h i el ded intercon n ect cables must be em p l oyed wi t hthis equ i pm ent to en su re com p l i a n ce with the perti-n ent RF em i s s i on limits governing this devi ce .

Notice to Users of the US Telephone NetworkThe LifeBook™ 700 Series notebook computers aresupplied with an internal modem which complieswith Part 68 of the FCC rules.On this notebook is a label that contains the FCC Registration Numberand the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for thisequipment among other information. If requested,the user must provide their telephone company withthe following information:

1. The telephone number to which the notebook is connected.

2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) forthis equipment.

3. That the equipment requires a standard modularjack type USOC RJ-11C which is FCC Part 68 compliant.

4. The FCC Registration Number.

This equ i pm ent is de s i gn ed to be con n ected to the tel eph one net work or premises wi ring using a standardm odular jack type USOC RJ-11C wh i ch is FCC Pa rt 68compliant and a line cord bet ween the modem and thetel eph one net work with a minimum of 2 6 AWG .

The REN is used to determine the nu m ber of devi ce sthat you may con n ect to your tel eph one line and sti llh ave all of those devi ces ring wh en your nu m ber isc a ll ed . Too many devi ces on one line may re sult in f a i lu re to ring in re s ponse to an incoming call . In most,but not all ,a reas the sum of the RENs of a ll of t h edevi ces should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain ofthe nu m ber of devi ces you may con n ect to your line,as determ i n ed by the RENs, con t act your local tel eph one com p a ny.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone net-work, your telephone company may discontinue yourservice temporarily. If possible,they will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical they willnotify you as soon as possible. You will also be advisedof your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

This fax modem also complies with fax brandingrequirements per FCC Part 68.

Your telephone company will probably ask you to dis-connect this equipment from the telephone networkuntil the problem is corrected and you are sure thatthe equipment is not malfunctioning. This equ i pm en tm ay not be used on coin servi ce tel eph ones provi dedby your tel eph one com p a ny. Con n ecti on to party linesis su bj ect to state tariffs . Con t act your state’s publ i cuti l i ty com m i s s i on ,p u blic servi ce com m i s s i on orcorpora ti on com m i s s i on for more inform a ti on .

FCC NOTICESNotice to Users of Radios and TelevisionThese limits are de s i gn ed to provi de re a s on a ble pro tec-ti on against harmful interferen ce in a re s i den tial instal-l a ti on . This equ i pm ent gen era te s ,u s e s , and can rad i a teradio frequ ency en er gy and, i f not install ed and used in accord a n ce with the instru cti on s ,m ay cause harm f u li n terferen ce to radio com mu n i c a ti on s . However, t h ereis no guara n tee that interferen ce wi ll not occur in ap a rticular install a ti on . If this equ i pm ent does causeh a rmful interferen ce to radio or tel evi s i on recepti on ,wh i ch can be determ i n ed by tu rning the equ i pm ent off and on , the user is en co u ra ged to try to correct thei n terferen ce by one or more of the fo ll owing measu re s :

■ Reori ent or rel oc a te the receiving anten n a .■ In c rease the sep a ra ti on bet ween the equ i pm ent

and receiver.■ Con n ect the equ i pm ent into an out l et that is on

a different circuit than the receiver.■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

Page 3: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

This equ i pm ent inclu des autom a tic dialing capabi l i ty.Wh en programming and/or making test calls to em er gency nu m bers :

■ Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.

■ Perform such activities in off-peak hours, suchas early morning or late evening.

FCC rules pro h i bit the use of n on - h e a ring aid com p a ti ble tel eph ones in the fo ll owing loc a ti ons or app l i c a ti on s :

■ All public or semipublic coin-operated or creditcard telephones.

■ E l eva tors ,h i ghw ays , tu n n els (autom obi l e , su bw ay,ra i l road or pede s trian) wh ere a pers on wi t hi m p a i red hearing might be isolated in an em er gen c y.

■ Places where telephones are specifically installedto alert emergency authorities such as fire, policeor medical assistance personnel.

■ Hospital rooms, residential health care facilities,convalescent homes and prisons.

■ Workstations for the hearing impaired.■ Hotel,motel or apartment lobbies.■ Stores where telephones are used by patrons

to order merchandise.

■ Public transportation terminals where telephonesare used to call taxis or to rese rve lodging orrental cars.

■ In hotel and motel rooms as at least ten percent of the rooms must contain hearing aid compatibletelephones or jacks for plug-in hearing aid compat-ible telephones which will be provided to hearingimpaired customers on request.

DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICESNotice to Users of Radios and TelevisionThis Class B digital app a ra tus meets all requ i rem ents of the Ca n adian In terferen ce - Causing Equ i pm en tReg u l a ti on s .

CET app a reil nu m é ri que de la class B re s pecte to utes les ex i gen ce du Régl em ent sur le matérial bro u i ll eur du Ca n ad a .

Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certi-fied equipment. This certification means that theequipment meets certain telecommunications net-work protective, operational and safety requirements.The Department does not guarantee the equipmentwill operate to the user’s satisfaction.

The Life Book 700 Series notebook com p uters aresu pp l i ed with an internal modem wh i ch complies with the In du s try Ca n ada certi fi c a ti on standards fortel ecom mu n i c a ti on net work pro tecti on and safetyrequ i rem en t s . Before con n ecting this equ i pm ent to a tel eph one line the user should en su re that it is per-m i s s i ble to con n ect this equ i pm ent to the local tel e -com mu n i c a ti on fac i l i ti e s . The user should be aw a rethat com p l i a n ce with the certi fi c a ti on standards doe snot prevent servi ce degrad a ti on in some situ a ti on s .

Rep a i rs to tel ecom mu n i c a ti on equ i pm ent should bem ade by a Ca n adian aut h ori zed mainten a n ce fac i l i ty. Anyrep a i rs or altera ti ons not ex pre s s ly approved by Fu j i t su™

PC Corpora ti on or any equ i pm ent failu res may give thetel ecom mu n i c a ti on com p a ny cause to request the user tod i s con n ect the equ i pm ent from the tel eph one line.

The con n ecting arra n gem ent code for this equ i pm ent is CA11A.

The Load Nu m ber is 3.

The Load Nu m ber assign ed to each tel eph one term i n a ldevi ce den o tes the percen t a ge of the total load to becon n ected to a tel eph one loop or circuit wh i ch is usedby the devi ce to prevent overl oad i n g. The term i n a ti onon a loop may consist of a ny com bi n a ti on of devi ce ssu ch that the total of the load nu m bers of a ll devi ce sdoes not exceed 100.

Page 4: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Réseau Téléphonique CanadienL’étiquette canadienne Industrie Canada identifiel’équipement certifié. Cette certification signifieque l’équipement satisfait certaines normes deprotection,d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications. Le département ne garantitpas le fonctionnement de l’équipement à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.

La série Life Boo kT M 700 po s s è de un modem i n terne con forme aux normes de certi fi c a ti ond ’ In du s trie Ca n ada pour pro t é ger les réseaux de télécom mu n i c a ti ons et sati s f a i re aux normes de sécuri t é . Avant de con n ecter cet équ i pem ent à unel i gne téléph on i qu e ,l ’ uti l i s a teur doit véri fi er s’il est permis de con n ecter cet équ i pem ent aux install a ti on sde télécom mu n i c a ti ons loc a l e s . L’ uti l i s a teur est avertique même la con formité aux normes de certi fi c a ti on ne peut dans certains cas em p ê ch er la dégrad a ti on du servi ce .

Les répara ti ons de l’équ i pem ent de télécom mu n i c a ti on sdoivent être effectuées par un servi ce de mainten a n cea gréé au Ca n ad a . To ute répara ti on ou mod i fi c a ti on , qu in’est pas ex pre s s é m ent appro uvée par Fu j i t su PC Corp. ,

C A U T I O N

For safety, users should ensure that theelectrical ground of the power utility, thetelephone lines and the metallic waterpipes are connected together. Users shouldNOT attempt to make such connectionsthemselves but should contact thea p p ropriate electric inspection authorityor electrician. This may be part i c u l a r l yi m p o rtant in rural are a s .

ou to ute défaill a n ce de l’équ i pem ent peut en tra î n er la com p a gnie de télécom mu n i c a ti ons à ex i ger que l ’ uti l i s a teur décon n ecte l’équ i pem ent de la ligne t é l é ph on i qu e .

Le code d’arra n gem ent de con n ex i on de ceté qu i pem ent est CA11A.

Le nu m é ro de ch a r ge est 3.

Le nu m é ro de ch a r ge assigné à ch a que terminal t é l é ph on i que indique le po u rcen t a ge de la ch a r ge totale po uvant être con n ecté à une bo u cle ou à un c i rcuit téléph on i qu e , utilisé par ce péri ph é ri que afin depr é venir to ute su rch a r ge . La term i n a i s on d’une bo u cl epeut être con s ti tuée de n’ i m porte qu elle com bi n a i s onde péri ph é ri ques de sorte que le total de nu m é ros dech a r ge de tous les péri ph é ri ques n’ exc è de pas 100.

Page 5: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

UL NOTICE (FOR AUTHORIZED REPAIR TECHNICIANS ONLY)C AU T I O N : For con ti nu ed pro tecti on against risk of fi re , rep l ace on lywith the same type and ra ting fuse.

C AU T I O N :D a n ger of ex p l o s i on if CMOS battery is incorrect ly rep l aced . Rep l ace on ly with the same or equ iva l ent type recom m en dedby the manu f actu rer. Di s pose of u s ed batteries according to the m a nu f actu rer ’s instru cti on .

WA R N I N G : CMOS and NiCAD batteries may ex p l ode if m i s tre a ted .Do not rech a r ge ,d i s a s s em ble or dispose of in fire .

A V E R T I S S E M E N T

Pour assurer la sécurité, les utilisateurs doivent vérifier que la prise de terre dus e rvice d’électricité, les lignes télphoniqueset les conduites d’eau métalliques sontconnectées ensemble. Les utilisateurs NEdoivent PAS tenter d’établir ces connexionseux-mêmes, mais doivent contacterles services d’inspection d’installationsélectriques appropriés ou un électricien.Ceci peut être part i c u l i è rement import a n ten régions ru r a l e s .

Page 6: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

Page 7: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

ii

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

SECTION ONESETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK 700SERIES FROM FUJITSU

Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Overview of Lifebook 700 Series Features . . . 4Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 6Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 7Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 8Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 8Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Starting Your Notebook for the First Time. . 13User Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Learning About Your Operating System

and Application Software. . . . . . . . . . 16

SECTION TWOUSING YOUR LIFEBOOK 700 SERIESFROM FUJITSU

Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Adjusting the Keyboard Angle . . . . . . . . 19Status Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Restarting The System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Fujitsu Welcome Center . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Integrated ErgoTrac Pointing Device . . . . . 30Using The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Pre-Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Agaté Tioman ProSwap . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

SECTION THREECONFIGURING YOUR LIFEBOOK 700SERIES FROM FUJITSU

Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Identifying the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54BIOS Setup Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . 57Main Menu – Setting Standard

System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Advanced Menu – Setting Device

Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Security Menu – Setting the

Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Power Menu – Setting Power

Management Feature Controls. . . . . . . 95Boot Menu – Selecting the

Operating System Source . . . . . . . . . 103Info Menu – Displaying Basic

System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility . . . 109Setting Up Your Save-to-Disk

File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Page 8: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

iii

SECTION FOURUSER INSTALLABLE FEATURES

Multi-function Bay Devices . . . . . . . . . 117PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Parallel Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Serial Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Stereo Line In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Mouse or Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 127External Installation of a

Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Memory Upgrade Module . . . . . . . . . . 129LANdock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

SECTION FIVETROUBLESHOOTING

Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 138Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . 158Emergency CD-ROM Drive Tray Release . . 161Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . . . 161Restoring Your Pre-Installed

Software from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . 162

SECTION SIXCARE AND MAINTENANCE

Caring for your Notebook . . . . . . . . . . 164Increasing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 165

APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONSWarranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Lifebook 770Tx Specifications. . . . . . . . 168Lifebook 790Tx Specifications. . . . . . . . 171Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

APPENDIX B GLOSSARYGlossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

INDEXIndex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Page 9: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

L i f eB oo k 7 0 0 Se r i e s f r om F u j i t suP r e f a c e

Page 10: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

P r e f a c e

vi

PREFACEThe LifeBook 700 Series from Fujitsu PCCorporation is a powerful notebook computer.It is powered by an Intel Pentium microproc-essor with MMX technology, has a built-incolor display, a CD-ROM drive and bringsthe computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a portable environment.

This manual explains how to operate yourLifeBook 700 Series’ hardware and built-in system software. The LifeBook 700 Series iscompatible with the IBM® PC AT. It comes with Windows 95 pre-installed.

A LifeBook 700 Series is a completely self-contained unit with an active-matrix (TFT)color LCD display. It has a powerful interfacethat enables it to support a variety of optionalfeatures. (Figure P-1.)

CONVENTIONS USED IN THE GUIDEScreen examples in this manual are intended asexamples only, and screen and file names maydiffer in actual use.

Messages displayed by the LifeBook 700 Seriesappear in Courier type.Example: Shutdown the computer?

Keyboard keys are shown in boldfaceHelvetica type.Example: Fn, F1, Esc, and Ctrl.

Pages with additional information about a spe-cific topic are cross-referenced within the text.Example: (See page xx.)

P O I N T

The point icon highlights informationthat will enhance your understanding ofthe subject material.

C A U T I O N

The caution icon highlights informationthat is important to your safety, to thesafe operation of your computer, or tothe integrity of your files. Please read allcaution information carefully.

Page 11: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s uL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

vii

Figure P-1 LifeBook 700 Serieswith Both Fujitsu and

Third Party Options

Page 12: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Setting Up Your L i feB ook 700 Ser ie sS e c t i o n O n e

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Overview of LifeBook 700 Series Features . . . 4

Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 7

Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 8

Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 8

Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Starting Your Notebook for the First Time . . 13

User Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Learning About Your Operating Systemand Application Software. . . . . . . . . . 16

Page 13: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

2

SECTION ONESETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK 700 SERIES FROM FUJITSUThis section describes how to set up yourLifeBook 700 Series from Fujitsu. We stronglyrecommend that you read it before using yournotebook – even if you are already familiar withnotebook computers.

UNPACKINGWhen you receive your notebook,unpack itcarefully, and compare the parts you havereceived with the items listed below.

For a standard configuration you should have:

■ LifeBook 700 Series from Fujitsu.(Figure 1-1.)

■ AC adapter with AC power cord (located inthe accessories box). (Figure 1-2.)

■ Modular Lithium ion battery. (Alreadyinstalled in Multi-function Bay 1 ofyour notebook.)

■ Modular 20-speed maximum CD-ROMdrive.(Already installed in Multi-functionBay 2 of your notebook.)

■ Modular 3.5" floppy disk drive (located in theaccessories box). (Figure 1-4.)

■ Device adapter for Multi-function Bay 2(located in the accessories box.) (Figure 1-3.)

■ RJ-11 cable (located in the accessories box).

■ Getting Started Guide.

■ User’s Guide.

■ Microsoft Windows 95 Manual.

■ Registration card and customerinformation pack.

■ Recovery CD-ROM(located in the accessories box).

■ LANdesk Client Manager 3.2 CD-ROM(located in the accessories box).

Figure 1-1 LifeBook 700 Series Notebook

Figure 1-2 AC Adapter Unit

Page 14: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

3

Once you have checked and confirmed thatyour notebook system is complete, connect theAC adapter and follow the instructions on page12-14 to accept the conditions for using theLifeBook 700 Series. When you have completedthe Conditions of Use process please registeryour notebook. (See page 15.)

Figure 1-3 Device Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2

Figure 1-4 Floppy Disk Drive

Page 15: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

4

C A U T I O N

The internal modem is not intended foruse with Digital PBX systems. Do notconnect the internal modem to a digitalPBX as it may cause serious damage tothe internal modem or your entire note-book. Consult your PBX manufacturer’sdocumentation for details. Some hotelshave Digital PBX systems. Be sure to findout BEFORE you connect your modem.

C A U T I O N

Your internal modem is designed toallow faster downloads from K56flexcompliant digital sources. Maximumachievable download transmission ratesmay not reach 56kbps and will varywith line conditions.

OVERVIEW OF LIFEBOOK 700 SERIES FEATURESThe LifeBook 700 Series is a compact, yetpowerful notebook computer available withstandard features including: (See Appendix A,pages 170-177, for detailed information on individual models.)

■ 200MHz or 266MHz Intel Pentium processorwith MMX technology.

■ 32MB SDRAM standard, expandable to 96MB.

■ 12.1" active-matrix (TFT) color display with800 x 600 resolution.

■ 2MB EDO video RAM.

■ DMI 2.0 compliant.

■ Built-in 3.2GB or 4.0GB hard drive.

■ Multi-function Bays which supportthe following:

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive ( i n clu ded with all model s ) .

■ 20-speed maximum CD-ROM drive(included with all models) (for Bay 2 only).

■ Optional second 3.2GB hard drive(for Bay 2 only).

■ Optional Zip drive.

■ Lithium ion battery(one included with all models).

■ Optional second Lithium ion battery.

■ Internal 56K fax/data/voice modem withbuilt-in telephony and DSVD support.

P O I N T

The Multi-function bays are warm-swappable with the Tioman ProSwap software. (see page 50)

Page 16: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

5

■ “No re-learning”, full-size keyboard withthree dedicated Windows 95 keys.

■ Hot swap connection for an externalkeyboard or an external mouse.

■ USB device support.

■ Bridge battery for warm-swappingcapabilities for batteries.

■ Standard pre-installed software:

■ Microsoft Windows 95 operating system.

■ LapLink for file transfer via modem,cableor infrared port.

■ PowerPanel for system power management.

■ Agate Tioman ProSwap for warm-swappingfunctionality in Multi-function bays.

■ PC-Doctor for system diagnostics.

■ SoftPEG from CompCore,an MPEG-1video player.

■ McAfee VirusScan for virus protection.

Figure 1-5 Top and Front Panel

■ Full audio and video features:

■ 16-bit SoundBlaster-compatible sound chip.

■ 3D-Stereo for multiple speaker effect.

■ Zoomed Video support for full motionvideo acceleration.

■ Built-in stereo speakers.

■ Built-in mono microphone.

■ Stereo line in jack.

■ Stereo headphone jack.

■ Microphone jack.

■ Two Type II/one Type III PC Card slot.

■ Fast IrDA (4Mbps) compatible infrared portfor wireless data transfer.

■ Integrated ErgoTrac™ pointing device forsuperb comfort and cursor control.

■ External monitor support with simultaneousdisplay capabilities.

■ ESS AudioRack for 3D-Stereo, audio CDand other audio controls.

■ MegaPhone for telephone applicationsincluding fax,dialing, and speakerphone.

■ Standard user-install software:

■ AT&T WorldNet Service.

■ AOL 3.0.

■ Netscape Communicator 4.04.

■ Internet Explorer 4.01.

Display Latch

Multi-function Bay

Power Switch

PS/2 Port

Power Port

Page 17: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

6

Figure 1-6 LifeBook 700 Series with Display Open

Display Panel

Status Indicator Panel

Keyboard

ErgoTracTM

pointing device

Multi-function Bay 1

Multi-function Bay 2

Closed Cover Switch

Suspend/Resume Button

Built-in Microphone

Brightness Control

Display Panel LatchCOMPONENT IDENTIFICATIONFor detailed specifictions on each model referto Appendix A on pages 170–177.

Page 18: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

7

TOP AND FRONT COMPONENTSDisplay Panel LatchThis latch locks and releases the display panel.When the display panel is released it pops upslightly to make it easier to open. (Figure 1-6.)

Display PanelThis is a color LCD panel with back lighting forthe display of text and graphics. (Figure 1-6.)

Brightness ControlThe brightness control adjusts the overallintensity of the display panel back lighting.(Figure 1-6.)

Built-in MicrophoneThe built-in microphone allows mono audioinput to your notebook. (Figure 1-6.)

Status Indicator PanelAn LCD display of the status of the power stateand source, Suspend mode,battery charge (bat-tery in either Multi-function Bay), floppy diskdrive activity, hard drive or zip drive activity,CD-ROM drive activity, PC Card activity,CapsLock, NumLk and Scr Lk. (Figure 1-6.)

Suspend/Resume ButtonThe Suspend/Resume button allows you to sus-pend notebook activity without turning off thenotebook power, and to return it to an activestate. This feature saves power, and is particu-larly useful when the notebook is running onlyon battery power. (See pages 38-46 and 95-102for more information on power management.)(Figure 1-6.)

Closed Cover SwitchThe closed cover switch turns off the LCD backlighting when the display panel is closed, thussaving power. This switch also behaves as aSuspend/Resume button, when the closedcover switch is set to Suspend/Resume in theBIOS Setup Utility. (see pages 95-102 for moreinformation on the BIOSSetup Utility)(Figure 1-6.)

KeyboardA full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows95 keys for input into the notebook.(Figure 1-6.)

ErgoTrac Pointing DeviceThe ErgoTrac pointing device is a joystick-likecursor control system with two click buttons.(Figure 1-6.)

Multi-function Bay OneThis bay accommodates:

■ Lithium ion battery.

■ Optional Zip Drive

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive.

C A U T I O N

Be sure you know which settings areactive for your Suspend/Resume buttonbefore you use it because misuse canresult in data loss. (See the PowerSavings Menu of the BIOS setup utility,pages 95-102, for more information.)

Page 19: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

8

LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTSPC Card SlotThe PC Card Slot allows you to install two TypeI or Type II PC Cards or one Type III PC Card.(See pages 124-126 for more information on PCCards.) The button to the left of the card slotlocks the card(s) in place,and the buttons to the right of the slot eject the card(s) fromthe slot. (Figure 1-7.)

Left SpeakerThe built-in dual speakers outputstereo sound from the notebook.(Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8.)

RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTSTheft Prevention Lock SlotThis is a slot that allows you to attacha physical lock down device. (Figure 1-8.)

USB PortThis port allows you to connect UniversalSerial Bus devices, such as external game pads,pointing devices, keyboards and speakers.(Figure 1-8.)

DC Power JackThe DC power jack allows you to plug in theAC adapter or the optional auto/airline adapter.(Figure 1-8.)

Figure 1-8 LifeBook 700 Series Right-side Panel

Stereo LineIn Jack

MicrophoneJack

External FloppyDisk Drive Port

Power Switch

Theft PreventionLock Slot

USBPort

DC Power JackRight SpeakerPort CoverPS/2Port

VolumeControl

Headphone Jack

Multi-function Bay TwoThis bay accommodates:

■ 20-speed maximum CD-ROM drive.

■ Optional Zip drive mounted in the deviceadapter for Multi-function Bay 2.

■ Lithium ion battery mounted in thedevice adapter for Multi-function Bay 2(a second battery can be purchased separ-ately for a dual battery configuration).

■ Optional second 3.2GB hard drive(which must be purchased separately).

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive mounted in the deviceadapter for Multi-function Bay 2.

C A U T I O N

Do not use your notebook with either ofthe Multi-function bays empty. It maydamage your notebook.

Figure 1-7 LifeBook 700 Series Left-side Panel

PC Card Eject Buttons

Left SpeakerPC Card SlotsPC Card Lock

Page 20: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

9

Power SwitchThis switch is the main power switch for yournotebook. (Figure 1-8.)

Right SpeakerThe built-in dual speakers output stereo soundfrom the notebook. (Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8.)

External Floppy Disk Drive PortA port for attaching an optional external floppydisk drive. This allows you to connect anoptional floppy disk drive when the Multi-function bays are being used for otherpurposes. (Figure 1-8.)

PS/2 PortThe port allows you to connect an externalPS/2 keyboard,mouse, or numeric keypad.(Figure 1-8.)

Microphone JackThe microphone jack allows you to connect anexternal mono microphone. (Figure 1-8.)

Stereo Line In JackThe stereo line in jack allows you to connect anexternal audio source to your notebook,like anaudio cassette player. This jack will not supportan external microphone. (Figure 1-8.)

Headphone JackYou can connect headphones or poweredexternal speakers to the headphone jack.(Figure 1-8.)

Volume ControlThe volume control is a knob which providesmanual control of the sound level of all audiooutput from your notebook. (Figure 1-8.)

REAR PANEL COMPONENTSRJ-11 JackThis is the jack for attaching a telephone line tothe internal modem. This jack can be used withthe connector cover closed and the sliding panelin the connector cover slightly opened foradded convenience. (Figure 1-9.)

C A U T I O N

There are also software volume controls.The knob setting and the softwaresettings will interact. Software volume off will override the knob setting and the software volume setting will controlthe maximum knob setting. (See VolumeControl on page 34 for more information.)

Figure 1-9 LifeBook 700 Series Rear Panel

RJ-11 Jack

Docking Port

Serial Port

Parallel Port

External Monitor Port

Infrared Port

Connector Cover

Slide Panel

Page 21: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

10

Serial PortThe serial port allows you to connect serial RS-232C devices, such as serial printers orserial scanners. (This is also sometimes referred to as a COM port.) (Figure 1-9.)

Parallel PortThe parallel port allows you to connectparallel devices, such as a parallel printerto your notebook. (This is also sometimesreferred to as a LPT port.) (Figure 1-9.)

External Monitor PortThis port allows you to connect an externalVGA or SVGA CRT monitor. (Figure 1-9.)

Infrared PortThe fast IrDA (4Mbps) compatible portallows you to communicate with another IrDAcompatible infrared device without a cable.(See page 47 for more information.)(Figure 1-9.)

C A U T I O N

The cover – which closes over the portson the rear of the notebook – can bedamaged if it is left open when the notebook is moved around.

Figure 1-10 LifeBook 700 Series Bottom

MemoryUpgradeCompartment

Docking AlignmentReceptacle

TiltAdjustment

Feet

Main UnitandConfigurationLabel

Multi-function Bay 1Release Button

Multi-function Bay 1

Multi-function Bay 2

Docking AlignmentReceptacle

Multi-function Bay 2Release Button

Docking PortThis port is for connection to an optional portreplicator or docking station. The connectorcover must be closed and the sliding panel fullyopened to reveal the docking port and the RJ-11 jack when connecting a port replicatoror a docking station. (Figure 1-9.)

C A U T I O N

The internal modem is not intended foruse with Digital PBX systems. Do notconnect the internal modem to a digitalPBX as it may cause serious damage tothe internal modem or your entire note-book. Consult your PBX manufacturer’sdocumentation for details. Some hotelshave Digital PBX systems. Be sure to findout BEFORE you connect your modem.

Page 22: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

11

BOTTOM COMPONENTSTilt Adjustment FeetThese are a pair of feet which flip down andhold the back of the notebook approximately6° higher than the front when resting on a flatsurface. They are designed to make using yournotebook keyboard more comfortable.(Figure 1-10.)

Main Unit and Configuration LabelThis label shows the model number and otherinformation about your notebook. In additionthe configuration portion of the label has theserial number and manufacturer informationthat you will need to give your support repre-sentative so that he or she can help you. It iden-tifies the exact version of various componentsof your notebook. (Figure 1-10.)

Memory Upgrade CompartmentThis compartment houses the memory upgrademodule which allows you to expand the systemmemory capacity of your notebook. (See pages129-130 for more information on installingadded memory capacity.) (Figure 1-10.)

Multi-function Bay 1 Release ButtonThis is the release to allow removal and instal-lation of devices in Multi-function Bay 1.(Figure 1-10.)

Multi-function Bay 1This compartment is accessed from the front ofyour notebook. (See Figure 1-6 on page 6.)

Multi-function Bay 2 Release ButtonThis is the release to allow removal and instal-lation of devices in Multi-function Bay 2.(Figure 1-10.)

Multi-function Bay 2This compartment is accessed from the front ofyour notebook. (See Figure 1-6 on page 6.)

POWER SOURCESYour notebook has four possible power sources:the primary Lithium ion battery; an optionaldual Lithium ion battery configuration; the ACadapter; or an optional auto/airline adapter.

Connecting the Power AdaptersThe AC adapter or an optional auto/airlineadapter provides power for operating yournotebook and charging the batteries.(Figure 1-11.)

To Connect the AC Adapter1. Plug the DC Output cable of the AC

adapter into the DC Power jack on theright-side panel of your notebook.

2. Plug the AC adapter into an ACelectrical outlet.

Figure 1-11 Connecting the AC Adapter

Page 23: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

12

DATA SECURITYYour LifeBook 700 Series has a built-in hard-ware control password security feature thatallows you to protect the data stored in thenotebook from unauthorized access. Your operating system and some applications have

software control password security features thatallow you to protect all or portions of the datastored in the notebook from unauthorized access.

Hardware Data Security FeaturesWhen you are using your notebook built-inhardware control password to gain access to thenotebook the actual password will not appearon the screen. This is a safety precaution. Thehardware control security parameters are setfrom the BIOS setup utility. (See Security Menuon pages 89-94 for more information on settingand clearing passwords and enabling and disabling built-in security features.)

Software Data Security FeaturesThe operating system and some applicationshave security features that are independent ofthe built-in hardware protection features thatare controlled from the BIOS. See your softwaredocumentation for more information aboutthese features.

C A U T I O N

The primary Lithium ion battery is notcharged when you purchase your note-book. Initially you will need to connectthe AC adapter or the auto/airline adapterto use it. If you purchase a second Lithiumion battery it will not be charged whenyou get it. You will need to charge it priorto use. It can take up to three (3) hours tocharge a single battery if your notebook is turned off or is in Suspend mode. Ifyour notebook is in use it can take up to nine (9) hours or more to charge a single battery.

To Connect the Optional Auto/airline Adapter1. Plug the DC Output cable into the DC

Power jack on the right-side panel ofyour notebook.

2. Plug the auto/airline adapter plug into thecigarette lighter of a car or other vehiclewith the ignition key in the On or theAccessories position or into the DCPower jack on an airplane seat.

To Switch From AC Adapter Power To Battery Power1. Be sure that you have at least one charged

battery installed.

2. Remove the AC or auto/airline adapter.

Page 24: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

13

C A U T I O N

Make sure you memorize your pass-words, both hardware and software. If you forget, you may not be able to usethe notebook, and you will have to con-tact your service provider and arrange tohave them reset the hardware systempassword. See your software documen-tation for what to do if you forget yoursoftware security password(s).

STARTING YOUR NOTEBOOK FOR THE FIRST TIMEBooting the SystemThe first time that you turn on your notebookyou will need to attach your AC adapterbecause the battery is not charged when youget your machine. We strongly recommendthat you not attach any other external devicesand do not put any CD or floppy disk in yourdrives until you have gone through the initialpower on sequence.

When you turn on your notebook for the firsttime it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen.If you do nothing the system will read the harddrive for the operating system software, flashthe notebook configuration information on thescreen,and then the Windows 95 Setup WizardScreen will appear. (See Power On on pages 23-24 for additional help.) You will then be steppedthrough the condition of use process. You mustcomplete this initial process before you will beable to use your notebook.(If you wish toaccess the BIOS setup utility before you gothrough the condition of use process you must

press the F2 key while the Fujitsu logo is stillvisible. If you press the Esc key while theFujitsu logo is still present you will get a dialogbox which will allow you to sele ct which driveis to be used for finding the operating system.)If you turn off the power without using the onscreen Cancel button you will get an errormessage when you start your notebook again.

Conditions of Use ProcessThe first time you start your notebook youmust confirm your acceptance of the copyrightlimitations for your pre-installed software.After you complete the Condition of Useprocess these screens will not appear again.There are 6 screens to read carefully andrespond to.

You cannot use your notebook until thisCondition of Use process is completed. Thebottom of each screen has a <Back button, aNext> Button and a Cancel button whichare activated by the integrated ErgoTrac cursorcontrol and button click. The <Back buttonwill return you to the previous screen. TheNext> button activates any choices or

C A U T I O N

Software security feature passwords maynot be the same as the hardware securitypasswords. Be sure you know which features are controlled from softwareand which from hardware or you maylock yourself out of your own data orlock up your hardware and not be ableto operate your notebook.

Page 25: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

14

move the text one screen at a time. When youfinish reading you must point and click toaccept or reject the terms of the agreement andthen click on the Next> button.

Start WizardThe Start Wizard screen will appear if you haveentered a valid product code. When you clickon the Finish button the display will flash vari-ous screens as the system identifies what hard-ware is installed and runs a virus check.

Time ZoneWhen your notebook has completely identifiedall of the installed hardware it will display adialog box for entering which time zone youwish to set the clock to.

Windows MessagingOnce you have selected a time zone you will seea screen announcing that Windows messagingis being set up.

Printer SetupWhen the messaging setup is complete a dialogbox will appear for selecting which printer is tobe attached to your notebook. You do not haveto select a printer at this time. If you do notwish to select a printer, click on the Cancelbutton. If you do wish to sele ct a printer clickon the Next button and answer the questions.

P O I N T

If you reject the terms of the licenseagreement you will be asked to reviewthe license agreement for information onreturning Windows 95 or to shut downyour notebook.

Certificate of AuthenticityLook in the box that your notebook came inand you will find a Windows 95 Certificate ofAuthenticity shrink wrapped with the Windows95 Users manual.On the certificate you willfind a bar-code with a number above it. This isyour product code and the number you shouldenter on the Certificate of Authenticity screen.When you have entered the number exactly asshown then click on the Next> button.

information you have entered and takes you onto the next screen. The Cancel button allowsyou to stop the setup process.

If you stop the process your notebook willstart up at the b eginning of the Windows 95Setup Wizard.

The screens you will be required to respond toare described with the required action.

User InformationFill in your name and your company name asyou want the software licensed. To step from thename blank to the company blank press the Tabkey. When the information has been enteredclick on the Next> button. You will not beallowed to continue until you make an entry.

License AgreementRead the agreement carefully. You can scrollthrough the text using the integrated ErgoTracpointing device to activate the scroll bar or usethe up arrow Õ and down arrow Ô keys tomove up and down the text one line at a time,or use the Page Up and Page Down keys to

Page 26: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e t t i n g U p Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r o m F u j i t s u

15

Windows 95 SetupOnce you have completed the printer setup, orif you have chosen not to set up a printer at thistime, you will see the Windows 95 Setup screen.This screen lets you set up Internet Explorer 4.0 with Active Desktop on your Lifebook. Followthe on-screen direction to complete installationof IE 4.0

How do I register?By modem,fax,mail or telephone.To registeryour system by modem, with your system upand running, click on the Fujitsu WelcomeCenter Icon. Complete the electronic form andclick on the “send registration” button. Yourregistration information will be t ransmitted viaphone lines to the Fujitsu Registration Centerand you will receive registration confirmationin one week to 10 days. You may also print yourcompleted registration form and fax it to1-714-450-9140 or mail it to:Fujitsu PC Corporation15355 Barranca Pkwy, Irvine,CA 92618-9520

Alternately you may call:1-800-8fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)

P O I N T

You will find a Recovery CD-ROM packetin your accessories box. Please store thepacket in a safe place in case there is aloss of data, and it becomes necessary to re-install your operating system and/or application programs. (See RestoringYour Pre-installed Software from theR e c o v e ry CD-ROM on pages 161-164.)

P O I N T

If you would like to skip the installationof Internet Explorer 4.0, go the the StartMenu on the desktop, select Shutdownand Restart the computer. After returningto Windows, you can install InternetExplorer 4.0 at any time by selectingthe icon Setup for Internet Explorer 4.0in the Internet Starts Here folderon the desktop.

REGISTERING YOUR LIFEBOOKWhat are the benefits of registering?You will receive an identification label for yourLifeBook, which, if your LifeBook is ever lost,may help in getting it returned to you. You alsoreceive priority Personal Identification Number(PIN) technical support access and useful prod-uct mailings. Proof of purchase is not requiredif you register within 30 days of your purchase.

Page 27: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n O n e

16

LEARNING ABOUT YOUR OPERAT I N GSYSTEM AND APPLICATION SOFTWA R ETutorialsAll operating systems and most applicationsoftware have tutorials built-in. We highly rec-ommend that you step through your tutorialbefore you use an application even if you arefamiliar with the same application on a differ-ent machine,an earlier version of the applica-tion, or a similar product.

ManualsIn the accessories box you will find manuals forWindows 95 and other pre-installed software.

Software manuals of pre-installed softwarethat are not in the accessories box are availableonline. See the help screens of your pre-installed software. We recommend that youreview these manuals for general informationon the use of these applications and to get abasic understanding of what is covered in themanual, and how it is organized, shouldquestions arise as you use the applications.

Page 28: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Using Your LifeBook 700 Series from FujitsuS e c t i o n T w o

Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Adjusting the Keyboard Angle . . . . . . . . 19

Status Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Fujitsu Welcome Center . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Integrated ErgoTrac Pointing Device . . . . . 30

Using the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Pre-installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Agaté Tioman Pro-Swap . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Page 29: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

18

SECTION TWOUSING YOUR LIFEBOOK 700 SERIES FROM FUJITSUThis section describes the indicators, buttons,connections and operating modes of yourLifeBook 700 Series and their use.

DISPLAY PANELOpening the Display PanelLifting the latch releases the top of the displaypanel from the front of the notebook body.When the display panel is released it pops upslightly to make it easier to open. Lift the dis-play panel backward until the screen is at acomfortable viewing angle. (Figure 2-1.)

Adjusting the Display PanelWhen you turn on your notebook, you maywant to adjust the brightness level of the screenfor best visibility. To do this, adjust the bright-ness control slider on the right side of the display panel. (Figure 2-2.) You may need toadjust the brightness periodically for different operating environments.

Figure 2-1 Opening the Display Panel

P O I N T

The higher the brightness level, the morepower the notebook will consume andthe faster your batteries will discharge.For maximum battery life, make sure thatthe brightness is set as low as possible.

Figure 2-2 Display Adjustments

Brightness ControlBrighter

Less Bright

Page 30: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

19

ADJUSTING THE KEYBOARD ANGLEOn the bottom of your notebook,near theback,are a pair of feet which flip down andhold the back of the notebook about 6° higherthan the front when resting on a flat surfa ce.They are designed to make it more comfortableto use the keyboard with your notebook. Thefeet must be folded flat against the bottomof the notebook when opening or using theCD-ROM drive or it will not open or operateproperly. (Figure 1-10 on page 10)

C A U T I O N

When you are not using the adjustmentfeet be sure that they are folded flatagainst the bottom of the notebook.They could be broken off or injuresomeone if not used properly.

STATUS INDICATOR PANELThe Status Indicator panel is located in therecess just above the keyboard. (Figure 2-3 onpage 20.) The appropriate indicators becomevisible as you use your notebook.

Power IndicatorThe Power indicator tells you when the systemis operational. It is on steady when there ispower to your notebook,and blinks when thesystem is in Suspend mode. It goes off whenthe system has entered Save-to-Disk mode,hasentered the Windows 95 pseudo-off state, orthe power is turned off from the power switch.

C A U T I O N

Do not operate your CD-ROM driveor attempt to open the tray unless yournotebook is sitting on a flat surface andthe adjustment feet are folded againstthe bottom of the notebook. Using aCD-ROM drive when it is not level may damage the drive or prevent proper operation.

P O I N T

When your notebook has been shutdown from Windows 95, it is not thesame as turned off from the powerswitch. It is in a pseudo-off state, with all applications closed, but can be turnedon by pressing the Suspend/Resume button. It is drawing some current inthe pseudo-off state.

C A U T I O N

Your notebook’s power switch must beturned off to prevent all current draw.

Page 31: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

20

AC Adapter IndicatorThe AC Adapter indicator tells you whether thesystem is operating on an AC or auto/airlineadapter, or batteries alone. The indicator is Onwhen either of the adapters is active and Offwhen power comes from the batteries alone. If abattery is charging, the Power Adapter indicatoris active regardless of the setting of the powerswitch. The AC Adapter indicator is also activein the Windows 95 pseudo-off state, regardlessof the battery status. If there is no batterycharging, and the power switch is Off,then theAC Adapter indicator and the Battery indicatorswill all be Off.

Battery IndicatorsThe two sets of battery indicators show whetheror not the primary Lithium ion battery and/orthe optional second Lithium ion battery areinstalled,and indicate the condition of each.(Figure 2-3.) Battery 1 is the Lithium ion bat -tery which is installed in Multi-function Bay 1and Battery 2 is the Lithium ion battery whichis installed in Multi-function Bay 2. The batteryindicators are displayed only for a battery whichis installed.

Figure 2-3 Status Indicator Panel

Power BatteryIdentifier

CD-ROM Drive Access

Hard Drive or

Zip Drive Access

AC Adapter BatteryLevel

PC Card Access

Floppy Disk Drive Access

NumLk

CapsLock

Scr LkBatteryCharging

PC CardSlot Identifier

Page 32: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

21

A small arrow icon (Battery Charging indica-tor) appears to the left of each of the BatteryLevel indicators and above the number (Batteryidentifier) if that battery is charging. TheBattery Charging indicator flashes if the batteryis too hot or too cold to charge. (Figure 2-3.)The Battery Charging indicators operatewhether the power switch is Off or On.

The symbols inside the battery outline of theBattery Level indicator show the operating levelavailable in that battery. (Figure 2-4.) If there isno battery charging and the power switch is Offthen the AC Adapter indicator and the Batteryindicators will all be off.

C A U T I O N

Turning off the power with the powerswitch or using the Suspend/Resumebutton when any of the Access indicatorsare On may cause loss of data and/orsystem errors.

C A U T I O N

A shorted battery is damaged and mustbe replaced. (See Figure 2-4.)

C A U T I O N

Batteries subjected to shocks, vibrationtemperatures or extreme temperaturescan be permanently damaged.

Figure 2-4 Battery Level Indicator

CD-ROM Drive Access IndicatorThe CD-ROM Access indicator tells youthe CD-ROM drive is being accessed. TheCD-ROM Access indicator will flash whenthe software tries to access a CD or CD-ROMeven if no CD-ROM drive is installed.

76%–100%

51%–75%

26%–50%

13%–25%

Low Warning ≤12%

Dead Battery

Shorted Battery

Page 33: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

P O I N T

The Hard Drive Access indicator doesnot show which hard drive, or Zip driveis being accessed. It works the samefor any one.

S e c t i o n T w o

22

P O I N T

The Windows 95 CD automatic insertionfunction will periodically check for aCD installed in the drive, causing theCD-ROM Access indicator to flash. TheCD automatic insertion function allowsyour system to automatically start a CDas soon as it is inserted in the drive andthe tray is closed. It will begin playingan audio CD or will start an applicationif the CD has an auto run file on it.

To disable the CD automatic insertion functiondo as follows:

1. Save all data and close all applications.

2. Click on the Start button.

3. Point to S e t t i n g s .

4. Click on the Control Panel. The controlpanel window will be displayed.

5. Double click on the System icon. The systemproperties dialogue box will be displayed.

6. Click on the Device Manager tab. The devicelist will be displayed.

7. Click on the + to the left o f the CD-ROMicon. The CD-ROM drive manufacturer’sname and model will be displayed.

8. Click on the CD-ROM drive manufacturer’sname and model.

9. Click on Properties. The CD-ROM drivemanufacturer’s name and model propertiesdialogue box will be displayed.

10. Click on the Settings tab.

11. Click on the automatic insertion notifica-tion box to toggle it off.

12. Click on O K .

13. Click on OK in the system propertiesdialogue box.

14. Restart your notebook according to themessage displayed.

You can re - en a ble the functi on by repe a ting theprocess except in step 11 ch a n ge the set ting to on .

Hard Drive or Zip Drive Access IndicatorThe Hard Drive Access indicator tells youwhen either the internal hard drive,theoptional second hard drive, or the optionalZip drive is being accessed.

P O I N T

If you do not wish to have the CDautomatic insertion function on youcan disable it.

Page 34: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

23

Floppy Disk Drive Access IndicatorThe Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator tellsyou a floppy disk drive is being accessed. TheFloppy Disk Drive Access indicator will flashwhen your software tries to access a floppy diskeven if no floppy disk drive is installed.

PC Card Access IndicatorsThe PC Card Access indicators tell you whenan installed PC Card is being accessed. Card 1is the bottom connector inside the slot andCard 2 is the upper connector inside the cardslot. Type III cards are always Card 1 only.The PC Card Access indicator will flash ifyour software tries to access a PC Card evenif none are installed.

NumLk IndicatorThe NumLk indicator tells you the internal key-boa rd is set in ten - key nu m eric keyp ad mode .(See pa ge 33 for more info rm a tion on the nu m eri ckeypa d . ) You can activa te the NumLk mode bypressing the NumLk/Scr Lk key while holdingdown the S h i f t key. De activa te the mode thesame way that you activa ted it.

CapsLock IndicatorThe CapsLock indicator tells you when the key-board is set for all capital letters. Activate the allcapital letters setting by pressing the CapsLockkey on the keyboard. Deactivate the setting thesame way that you activated it.

Scr Lk IndicatorThe Scr Lk indicator tells you when scroll lockis active. You can activate or deactivate thescroll lock by pressing the NumLk/Scr Lk key.Deactivate the mode the same way that youactivated it.

POWER ONFacing the keyboa rd and display panel ,m ove thepower swi tch tow a rds the rear of your noteboo k .This is the On po s i ti on . (See Fi g u re 2-5.) Wh enyou are done working you can leave your note-book in Su s pend mode , ( see pa ges 44 and 95),or you can tu rn it of f . The power swi tch movedtow a rd the front of your notebook is in the Offpo s i ti on . (See the se ction Power Of f , pa ges 24-25,for the re co m m en d ed shutof f pro cedu re s .)

Figure 2-5 Power Switch

On

Off

Page 35: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

24

C A U T I O N

After turning off your notebook, makesure that it has been Off at least 10 seconds before turning the power switchto On. If you do not you could cause asystem error. When you turn on yournotebook be sure you have a powersource. This means that at least one battery is installed and charged, or thatthe AC adapter or the auto/airlineadapter is connected and has power.

C A U T I O N

The main Lithium ion battery is notcharged when you purchase your note-book. Initially you will need to connectthe AC adapter to use it. If you purchasean optional second Lithium ion battery, itwill not be charged when you get it, youwill need to charge it prior to use.

C A U T I O N

Never turn off your notebook duringPower On Self Test (POST) or it willcause an error message to be displayedwhen you turn your notebook on thenext time. (See the Troubleshootinginformation on pages 138-140.)

C A U T I O N

Do not carry your notebook around with the power on or subject it to shocksor vibration, as you risk damaging your notebook.

When the power switch is turned on, yournotebook carries out a Power On Self Test(POST) to check the internal parts and config-uration. If a fault is found a beep will soundand/or an error message will be displayed.(See Troubleshooting on pages 138-140) Depend-ing on the nature of the problem you may beable to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the setup utility andrevising the settings.

Af ter sati s f actory com p l eti on of the Power OnSel f Test (POST) your notebook wi ll load yo u ropera ting sys tem . (See Boot Menu on pa ges 105-106 to see wh i ch kind of disk wi ll be the sou rce.)

POWER OFFBefore turning off the power by putting thepower switch in the Off position, check that theHard Drive,CD-ROM, PC Card and the FloppyDisk Drive Access indicators are all Off. (SeeFigure 2-3, page 20.) If you turn off the powerwhile accessing a disk or PC Card there is a riskof loss of data. The Off position is reached byfacing the keyboard and display panel,andmoving the switch toward the front of yournotebook. To assure that your notebook shutsdown without error, use the Windows 95 shutdown procedure.

Page 36: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

25

If you are going to store your notebook for amonth or more,take the following precautions:

1. Remove any CD and/or floppy disk.

2. After shutting down with Windows 95 turnoff your notebook using the power switch.

3. Close your notebook display panel.

4. Disconnect the AC adapter.

5. Remove the batteries and store themseparately in a cool dry place.

RESTARTING THE SYSTEMWhen you wish to restart your system besure that you follow the proper procedure.The procedure is as follows:

1.Go to the Start button menu.

2. Click on S h u t D o w n .

3. Click on Restart the computer?

4. Verify that Restart the computer? is selected and click on Y e s .

Windows 95 will shutdown and restartyour notebook.

C A U T I O N

Never turn your notebook off while anapplication is running. Be sure to close allfiles, exit all applications and shut downyour operating system prior to turning offthe power with the power switch. If fil e sa re open when you turn the power off ,you will lose any changes that have notbeen saved, and may cause disk erro r s .

Shutting down your notebook from Windows95 lets your notebook shut down operations,and turn off the power in the proper sequenceto prevent errors. The sequence is:

1.Go to the Start button menu.

2. Click on S h u t D o w n .

3. Verify that Shut down the computer?is selected and click on Y e s .

P O I N T

When your notebook has been shutdown from Windows 95, it is not thesame as being turned off from the powerswitch. It is in a pseudo-off state, with allapplications closed, but can and must beturned on by pressing the Suspend/Resume button. It is drawing some current in the pseudo-off state.

P O I N T

You may also select Shut down thecomputer and once the power is off for10 seconds or more you can restart y o u rnotebook with the Suspend/Resumebutton, or once the power is off, turn thepower switch to Off for 10 seconds andthen switch it to On. These alternativemethods are not recommended.

Page 37: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

26

P O I N T

In Windows 95 pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Delkeys simultaneously triggers theShutDown submenu of the Start menu.

c a t a l og with the inform a ti on for ordering acce s-s ories for your noteboo k . Do u ble lef t - cl i ck onthe icon and then on the appropri a te but ton forthe inform a ti on sel ecti on you wi s h .

BATTERIESThe Lithium ion batteries are rech a r ge a ble wi t han opera ting time of up to three (3) hoursdepending on active power managem ent fe a-tu res and user activi ty level s . Your notebook canbe opera ted on the pri m a ry Lithium ion batterya l one or in a dual battery con fig u ra ti on with anopti onal second Lithium ion battery. A bu i l t - i nbri d ge battery all ows a ch a r ged Lithium ionb a t tery to be exch a n ged for a disch a r ged on eby “ w a rm - s w a pp i n g”. To warm - s w a p, h ave ach a r ged battery re ady, p ut your notebook inSu s pend mode , rem ove the low battery andqu i ck ly insert a ch a r ged battery.

The Lithium ion battery operating time maybecome shorter than the reference value if it isused under the following conditions:

■ When used at temperatures that exceed a lowof 5°C or a high of 35°C. High temperaturesnot on ly redu ce ch a r ging ef f i c i en c y, butcan also cause battery deteri ora ti on . (Th eCh a r ging icon on the Status In d i c a tor panelwi ll flash wh en you try to ch a r ge a battery thatis out s i de its opera ting tem pera tu re ra n ge . )

■ The battery ch a r ging capac i ty is redu ced as theb a t tery age s . If your battery is running lowqu i ck ly, you should rep l ace it with a new on e .

■ When using a high cur rent device such as amodem, a LAN card,the CD-ROM drive, orthe hard drive frequently.

Using the AC adapter will conserve your batterywhen using a high current device such as amodem, a LAN card,the CD-ROM drive, or thehard drive frequently.

C A U T I O N

Turning off the power switch withoutexiting Windows 95 may cause an errorwhen you start the next time. Turningthe power to On when it has been Offfor less than 10 seconds may also causean error when you start the next time.

FUJITSU WELCOME CENTERThe Fu j i t su Wel come Cen ter is an icon onyour Wi n dows 95 de s k top. Cl i cking on it give syou access to produ ct regi s tra ti on forms andi n s tru cti on s , ch a n ge of ad d ress inform a ti on andform s , con t act inform a ti on including tel eph on enu m bers and e-mail ad d re s s e s , and an acce s s ory

Page 38: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

27

C A U T I O N

Actual battery life will vary basedon screen brightness, applications,features, power management settings,battery condition, and other customerpreferences. CD-ROM drive or hardusage may also have a significantimpact on battery life.

Bridge BatteryThe bridge battery is a NiCd battery that isbuilt-in your notebook and is constantly beingrecharged.A bridge battery allows a chargedLithium ion battery to be exchanged for a dis-charged one by “warm-swapping”.

To warm-swap have a charged battery ready,put your notebook in Suspend mode, removethe low battery and quickly insert a charged

battery. The bridge battery capacity is not large,about 3 minutes,and can vary with the condi-tion of your notebook.

C A U T I O N

Do not leave a faulty battery in yournotebook. It might damage your ACadapter, optional auto/airline adapter,another battery, or your notebook itself.It may also prevent operation of yournotebook by draining all available currentinto the bad battery.

C A U T I O N

Under federal, state or local law itmay be illegal to dispose of batteries byputting them in the trash. Please takecare of our environment and disposeof batteries properly. Check with yourlocal government authority for detailsregarding recycling or disposing ofold batteries. If you cannot find thisinformation elsewhere, contact yoursupport representative at 1-800-8FUJITSU(1-800-838-5487).

C A U T I O N

Data may be lost and/or systemerrors introduced if the warm swap isnot performed quickly or a poweradapter installed.

C A U T I O N

The bridge battery can not support anoperating notebook. The notebook mustbe in Suspend mode.

Shorted BatteriesIf your Status Indicator panel shows a shortedbattery, check the installation for that battery byremoving and re-installing it. If it still showsthat it is shorted, replace it with a new battery.

Page 39: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

28

■ Make sure the battery to be charged isinstalled in either Multi-function bay ofyour notebook and connect the AC orauto/airline adapter.

■ Make sure that the Battery Charging indica-tor to the left of the Battery Level indicatorof the battery to be charged is visible on theStatus Indicator panel.

■ Make sure the percentage charge is showninside the Battery Level icon. (Figure 2-4on page 21.)

When two Lithium ion batteries are installed,the charge/discharge rate of the primary andoptional second Lithium ion batteries are thesame,as they are connected in parallel and areboth charging and/or discharging at the sametime. Since the rates are the same, one mayfinish charging or discharging before the otherif they were not at the same charge le vel whenthey were installed and/or the AC or auto/airline adapter was connected.

There is no memory effect on the Lithium ionbatteries, which means that you do not need todischarge them completely before recharging.A single fully discharged Lithium ion batterywill charge in approximately three (3) hourswhen your notebook is Off or in Suspend mode.The charging time from fully discharged for twoLithium ion batteries together, is approximately 5hours when your notebook is Off or in Suspendmode.Of course partially charged batteries willnot take as long to charge. The charge times willbe significantly longer if your notebook is in usewhile the batteries are charging (from approxi-mately nine (9) hours for one battery to approxi-mately 15 hours for two batteries with normaloperating levels).

C A U T I O N

A shorted battery is damaged and mustbe replaced so that it does not damageanything else.

Recharging the BatteriesIf you want to ch eck the con d i ti on of ei t h er thepri m a ry Lithium ion battery or an opti onal sec-ond Lithium ion battery, ch eck the Ba t tery Leveli n d i c a tors loc a ted on the Status In d i c a tor panel .These indicators ch a n ge as the battery level sch a n ge . Ba t tery 1 is a Lithium ion battery wh i chis install ed in Mu l ti - f u n cti on Bay 1 and Ba t tery2 is a Lithium ion battery wh i ch is install ed inMu l ti - f u n cti on Bay 2. ( Fi g u re 2-3 on pa ge 20.)You can also ch eck the Power Pa n el too l b a r.

The Lithium ion batteries are recharged inter-nally using the AC adapter or auto/airlineadapter. To recharge the batteries:

C A U T I O N

Using heavy current devices such as LANcards or frequent CD-ROM accesses mayprevent charging completely.

Page 40: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

29

Low Battery StateWhen the battery is running low, your note-book beeps about every 15 seconds and theBattery Level indicator(s) flash. If you do notrespond to the low battery alarm,the batterieswill continue to discharge until they are too lowto operate. When this happens there will be amultiple beep alarm,the Battery Level indicatorwill show dead battery, and your notebook willgo into Suspend mode to try and protect yourdata as long as possible. Your power manage-ment settings do not affect what happens at thedead battery alarm level. Your notebook will goto Suspend mode. (Figure 2-3 on page 20.)

When the low battery alarm occurs you need tosave all your active data and put your notebookinto Suspend mode until you can provide a newpower source. You should provide this power assoon as possible. The new power source can bea charged battery or a power adapter, either ACor auto/airline.

Battery Suspend mode shows on the Statusindicator just like the normal Suspend mode.Once you have provided power, you will needto press the Suspend/Resume button to resumeoperation. In the Suspend mode, your data canbe maintained for sometime. If a power sourceis not provided promptly, the Power indicatorwill stop flashing and go out,and you will havelost the data that was not stored.

Once you provide power you can continue to useyour notebook while an adapter is charging thebattery, but the battery trickle charges underthese conditions. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your notebook intoSuspend mode, or turn off your notebook whilethe adapter is charging the battery. (See PowerOffon pages 24-25 for shutdown procedures.)

C A U T I O N

You may not be able to hear the audioalarms if the volume control is set toolow or is turned off by either hardware orsoftware but you will still be able to seethe Battery Level indicator(s) flash.

C A U T I O N

When you are in Suspend mode theremust always be at least one power sourc eactive. If you turn off the power withthe power switch, or remove all powers o u rces, battery, AC adapter or auto/airline adapter, while your notebook is inSuspend mode any data which has notbeen saved to the hard drive will be lost.

Once your notebook goes into Dead BatterySuspend mode you will be unable to resumeoperation until you provide a source of powereither from an AC adapter, an optional auto/airline adapter, or a charged battery. Dead

C A U T I O N

There is no guarantee that data will notbe lost once your notebook enters theDead Battery Suspend mode.

Page 41: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

30

INTEGRATED ERGOTRAC POINTING DEVICEThe ErgoTrac pointing device is composedof a short, comfortable, dish-shaped pointingdevice and two buttons located in front of thekeyboard. The ErgoTrac pointing device has the function of a mouse,and moves the cursoraround on the screen – up, down, left and right.A light pressure with the tip of your finger is allthat is required to operate the ErgoTrac. Themore pressure you use the faster the cursor wil lmove. The second part of the ErgoTrac pointingdevice – the buttons – function as mouse but-tons,and the functions they perform depend on the application you are running. Figure 2-6shows the position of the ErgoTrac pointingdevice and buttons.

Figure 2-6 ErgoTrac Pointing Device

Right Button

Left Button

Cursor Control

Cursor

P O I N T

An external mouse can be connected to the PS/2 port on the right side of thenotebook, and used simultaneously withthe ErgoTrac pointing device.

Page 42: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

31

ClickingClicking means pushing and releasing a button.To left-click move the screen cursor to the itemyou wish to select, press the left pointing devicebutton once,and then immediately release it. Toright-click,move the mouse cursor to the it emyou wish to select, press the right pointingdevice button once,and then immediatelyrelease it. (Figure 2-7.)

Double-ClickingDouble-clicking means following the precedingClicking procedure, but pressing the pointing

device button twice in rapid succession.Double-clicking works with both the leftand right buttons.

DraggingDragging means selecting an item with thepointing cursor, and while keeping the leftpointing device button depressed, moving thecursor to the desired new location, then releas-ing the button. (Figure 2-8.)

Figure 2-7 Clicking

Left Click Left Double Click

C A U T I O N

If the interval between clicks is too long,double-clicking will not be executed.

P O I N T

The interval between presses for doubleclicking, and other parameters of pointingand selecting, can be adjusted with theselections in the dialog box of the mouseicon in your Windows Control panel.

Figure 2-8 Dragging

ErgoTrac Pointing Device Control AdjustmentThe Windows Control Panel provides customiz-ing of your ErgoTrac pointing device from themouse icon. There are four (4) aspects of theErgoTrac pointing device operation which youcan adjust.

■ Buttons – This lets you set up the buttons forright or left handed operation and set thetime interval for double clicking.

Page 43: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

32

■ Pointers – This lets you set up the size andshape of the cursor for different functions.

■ Motion – This lets you set up the relation ofthe speed of motion of your finger to themotion of the cursor and to enable a t railingtail for the cursor arrow.

■ General – This allows you to choose the t ypeof mouse being used. It is already set for yourintegrated ErgoTrac. You may need to changeit for an external mouse.

You may want to try practicing with differentadjustments until you find a combination thatis comfortable for you.

USING THE KEYBOARDYour notebook has an integral 86-key keyboard.(Figure 2-9.) The keys perform all the standardfunctions of a 101-key keyboard and alsoinclude Windows 95 keys and other specialfunction keys. This section describes only thoseitems specific to your notebook. They are thenumeric keypad,the cursor keys,the functionkeys, the function extension key (Fn) and theWindows 95 keys.

Figure 2-9 Keyboard

Function Keys Numeric Keypad

Fn Key Start Key Start Key Application Key Cursor Keys

Page 44: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

33

Numeric KeypadCertain keys on the keyboard perform dualfunctions as both standard character keys andnumeric keypad keys.Figure 2-9 highlightsthese keys. To switch into numeric keypadmode, press the NumLk/Scr Lk while holdingdown the Shift key. You can now enter numerals0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction( – ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ),andenter decimal points ( . ) using the keys desig-nated as ten-key function keys. The keys in thenumeric keypad are marked on the front edgeof the key to indicate their secondary functions.

To return these keys to their normal characterfunction, press the NumLk/Scr Lk while holdingdown the Shift key again.

P O I N T

When an external numeric keypad is con-nected to the notebook the NumLk modeenables the external keypad and disablesthe built-in keyboard numeric keypad.

Pressing F5 while holding down the Fn keyallows you to toggle between video compensa-tion and no compensation. (Video compensa-tion controls spacing on the display. When it isenabled,displays with less than 800 x 600 pixelresolution will still cover the entire screen.)

Pressing F 1 0 while holding down the F n keya ll ows you to ch a n ge your sel ecti on of wh ere tos end your display vi deo. E ach time you press thecom bi n a ti on of keys you wi ll step to the nex tch oi ce . The ch oi ce s , in order, a re : built-in dis-p l ay panel on ly, ex ternal mon i tor on ly, or bo t hbuilt-in display panel and ex ternal mon i tor.

Windows 95 KeysYour notebook has three Windows 95 keys,twoStart keys and an Application key. The Start keydisplays the Start menu. This is the same as thebutton on the toolbar which is typically at thebottom of your Windows 95 desktop. TheApplication key has the same function inWindows 95 as the right mouse button,it dis-plays the Shortcut menu for whatever item isselected. See your Windows 95 documentationfor additional information. (See Figure 2-9.)

Cursor KeysThe cursor keys are the four arrow keys on thekeyboard which allow you to move the cursorup Õ, down Ô, left Ó and right È as yourapplication allows.

P O I N T

The integrated ErgoTrac pointing deviceand/or external mouse are also used formoving the cursor around the screen.

Function KeysYour notebook has 12 function keys, F1 throughF12. The functions assigned to these keys differfor each application. You should refer to yoursoftware documentation to find out how thesekeys are used. (See Figure 2-9.)

Fn KeyThe Fn key provides extended functions for thenotebook and is always used in conjunctionwith another key. (See Figure 2-9.)

Page 45: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Loading a Floppy DiskTo load,insert a floppy disk into the floppy diskdrive,shutter side first and label up, until theEject button,above the floppy disk drive open-ing, pops out. (Figure 2-10.)

S e c t i o n T w o

34

VOLUME CONTROLAll system and application functions have mul-tiple volume controls which interact with eachother. There is the hardware volume control onthe right side panel o f your notebook. There isa volume control in the ESS AudioRack, youroperating system Sound Control panel and anyother application with sound.

Each setting source puts an upper limit on thevolume which can be set by the other sources.For example if the hardware volume control isturned all the way down, your software volumecontrol settings have no effect. By the sametoken, if the ESS AudioRack has the soundturned off, adjusting the hardware or otherapplication software volume settings will notproduce sound.One easy operating method isto use the hardware and ESS AudioRack volumecontrols to set an upper limit on sound le veland then make fine adjustments with otherapplication software.

C A U T I O N

The ESS AudioRack volume settingsets the maximum volume level of thehardware volume control knob.

will treat any floppy disk drive in exactly thesame way regardless of where it is installed.(For floppy disk drive installation and removalinstructions see Multi-function Bays on pages 117-123 and External Installation of a Floppy DiskDrive on page 128.) When your system boots itwill always look first for a floppy disk drive in aMulti-function Bay 1, Multi-function Bay 2, andthen look at the external floppy disk drive port.

C A U T I O N

If you use a speakerphone function, be sure that the microphone setting inthe ESS AudioRack (recorder portion) is disabled.

FLOPPY DISK DRIVEThe modular floppy disk drive is a 3.5" dr ivewhich can read and write on 1.44MB and720KB memory capacity floppy disks.Floppydisk format is controlled from your operatingsystem.(See your software documentation formore information.) The modular floppy diskdrive can be used in Multi-func tion Bay 1,Multi-function Bay 2 with the device adapterfor Multi-function Bay 2, or you can use theoptional external floppy disk drive. The system

C A U T I O N

To get your system to recognize a newlyinstalled floppy disk drive you mustrestart your notebook.

Page 46: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

35

Ejecting a Floppy DiskTo eject a disk, check that the Floppy DiskDrive Access indicator is Off, (see pages 20 and 23) and press the Eject button.(Figure 2-10.)

To prevent data stored on a floppy disk frombeing erased,slide the write protect tab on thefloppy disk to open up the small hole. Thismakes the disk write protected. When you wantto write data to that disk,slide the write protecttab the other way to close the small hole.

Figure 2-10 Loading/Ejecting a Floppy Disk

P O I N T

When there is no floppy disk in the drive,the Eject button is flush with the front ofyour notebook.

C A U T I O N

If you eject the disk while the FloppyDisk Drive Access indicator is On, there isa risk of damaging the data on the diskor the disk drive.

Figure 2-11 Floppy Disk Write Protect

Preparing a Floppy Disk for UseBefore you can use a new fl oppy disk, you needto prepare it so your notebook knows where tostore information. This preparation is calledformatting or initializing a disk. You need toformat new 3.5" floppy disks, unless you pur-chase preformatted disks. You will use yournotebook’s operating system software to formata floppy disk.Please refer to the operating sys-tem manual for step-by-step instructions.

Write Enabled

Write Protected

Page 47: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

36

C A U T I O N

Formatting a previously used floppydisk is an effective method of clearing adisk as long as you realize that ALL theinformation on the disk will be erased.

■ Never store a floppy disk near a magnet ormagnetic field.

■ To clean, wipe the floppy disk drive cleanwith a dry soft cloth or with a soft clothdampened with water or a solution of neutraldetergent. Never use benzene,paint thinner,or other volatile material.

■ Never disassemble or dismantle your floppydisk drive.

CD-ROM DRIVEThe modular CD-ROM drive is a 20-speedmaximum modular reader.

C A U T I O N

Do not operate your CD-ROM driveunless your notebook is sitting on a flat surface and the adjustment feetare folded against the bottom of thenotebook. Using a CD when the driveis not level may damage the drive orprevent proper operation.

Care of Floppy Disk Drives and Disks■ Avoid storing the floppy disk drive and

disks in extremely hot and cold locations,or in locations subject to severetemperature changes.

■ Keep the floppy disk drive and disksout of direct sunlight and away fromheating equipment.

■ Avoid storing the floppy disk drive inlocations subject to shock and vibration.

■ Avoid using the floppy disk drive and disks in damp and dusty locations.

■ Never use the floppy disk drive with anyliquid,metal, or other foreign matter insidethe floppy disk drive or disk.

Figure 2-12 Loading the CD-ROM Tray

Page 48: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

37

Loading a CD■ Make sure that the angle adjustment feet on

the bottom of the notebook are foldedagainst the bottom of the notebook.

■ Make sure there is power to your notebook.

■ Push, gently but firmly, and release the ejectbutton on the front of the CD-ROM drive toopen the CD-ROM holder tray, the tray willcome out a short distance.

■ Gently pull the tray out until a CD-ROM canbe easily placed in the tray.

■ If there was a protective sheet in the traywhen it was shipped,make sure ithas been removed.

■ Place the CD into the t ray, label side up, withthe hole in the center of the CD snappedonto the raised circle in the center of the tray.

■ Close the tray.

■ After the CD is lo aded,it will take a shorttime for your notebook to recognize it.

P O I N T

If you have disabled your CD automaticinsertion function you will have to startthe CD from your desktop, as yournotebook will not automaticallyrecognize that the CD has been loaded.

■ When removing the CD-ROM from its case,press down on the holder’s center while lift-ing out the CD-ROM by its edges.

■ Always handle a CD-ROM by the edges andavoid touching the surface.

■ Avoid storing any CD-ROM in extremetemperatures.

■ Do not bend CD-ROMs or set heavy objectson them.

■ Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen, pencil or similar device.

■ If a CD-ROM is subjected to a suddenchange in temperature, cold to warm con-densation may form on the surface. Wipe themoisture off with a clean,soft,lint free clothand let it dry at room temperature. DO NOTuse a hair dryer or heater to dry a CD-ROM.

■ If a CD-ROM is dirty, use only a CD-ROMcleaner or wipe it with a clean,soft, lint freecloth starting from the inner edge and wipingto the outer edge.

Figure 2-13 CD-ROM Handling

Care of CD-ROMsCD-ROMs are precision devices and will func-tion reliably if given reasonable care.

■ Always store your CD-ROM in its case whenit is not in use.

Page 49: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

38

HARD DRIVEThe internal hard drive capacity is dependenton which model you are using. See Appendix A (pages 170–177) for model information. Ifyou are using the optional second hard drive forthe first time since you installed it, you can getyour notebook to recognize it by opening theWindows 95 Control Panel and opening AddNew Hardware which will step you throughthe process of having Windows look for yournewly installed device.

Formatting the Hard DriveThe hard drive inside your notebook is form a t-ted (initi a l i zed) at the factory. You do not needto format it under normal circ u m s t a n ce s . If yo up u rchase an opti onal second hard drive you wi lln eed to format it before you use it the first ti m e .Ch eck your opera ting sys tem doc u m en t a ti on fori n form a ti on on initializing a hard drive .

C A U T I O N

If you reformat the internal hard driveALL data including the operating system,applications software and data will beerased. Unless data is copied to floppydisks or other data storage media it willbe permanently lost. All software will beneed to be re-installed and data filesrestored from your back-up disks. Seethe operating system manual for moreinformation on backing-up your datafiles. The factory installed software,including the operating system, can berestored from the Recovery CD-ROMwhich came in the accessories box whenyou purchased your notebook. (SeeRestoring Your Pre-installed Softwarefrom CD-ROM on page 161 for moreinformation.) Any application softwarewhich you have purchased and installedwill have to be re-installed from the original source. When doing a recoveryremember that you must allocate space

for the Save-to-Disk function if you haveit enabled. (See Setting Up Your Save-to-Disk File Allocation on pages 112-113for more information.)

POWER MANAGEMENTYour LifeBook 700 Series has many features forconserving power. Some power savings featuresare automatic and have no user control, suchas those for the internal modem, while othersdepend on the parameters you set to best suityour operating conditions. Other power savingfeatures turn the display brightness down, limitthe use of high power devices, activate anappropriate power savings profile, and put yournotebook in Suspend mode when not actuallyperforming an operation. As with all mobile,battery-powered computers,there is a trade-offbetween performance and power savings.

Internal power management for your notebookis controlled from settings made in the BIOSsetup utility, the PowerPanel by PhoenixTechnologies,and the Windows 95 Control

Page 50: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

39

panel. If no settings have been made in thePowerPanel or Windows 95 Control panel thenthe BIOS settings will be used. The PowerPaneland Windows 95 Control panel have beenpre-set at the factory and will be active unlessyou disable them. Complete descriptions of theBIOS setup utility parameters are found inSection Three of this guide. Power managementparameters are covered under the PowerSavings menu. (See pages 95-100.)

Some particular power parameters are onlyavailable for setup from one of these places,others can be changed in any one of them.

ACPIShort for Advanced Configuration & PowerInterface,a power management specificationdeveloped by Intel, Microsoft,and Toshiba.ACPI, which will be part of the Windows 98operating system, enables the operating systemto control the amount of power given to eachdevice attached to the computer. With ACPI,the operating system can turn off peripheraldevices, such as CD-ROM players, when they

are not in use. The LifeBook 700 Series note-book computers have built in BIOS support forthe ACPI 1.0 standard,and will be able to takeadvantage of this functionality in Windows 98.

ACPI support is enabled in the BIOS set-uputility as described in Section Three of thisguide. (See pages 87-88).

Using the Suspend/Resume ButtonWhen your notebook is active,the Suspend/Resume button, (Figure 1-6 on page 6) , can beused to manually put your notebook intoSuspend mode, or into Save-to-Disk mode.

Push the Suspend/Resume button, when yournotebook is active but no Access indicators areon,and hold it in until it is acknowledged byactivation of the selected mode. Which mode isactivated is determined by the settings of theBIOS setup utility Power Savings menu. Thedefault is Suspend mode. (See page 95 for howto select Save-to-Disk mode.)

If your notebook is suspended,pushing theSuspend/Resume button will return your note-book to active operation at the point where itwent into suspension. The Suspend/Resumebutton is located next to the Status Indicatorpanel above the keyboard of your notebook.(Figure 2-14.) You can tell whether or not yoursystem is in Suspend mode by looking at thePower indicator. (See pages 19-20.) If it is visibleand not flashing, your notebook is fully opera-tional. If it is visible and flashing, your note-book is in Suspend mode. If it is not visible,the power is Off,the power is in the Windows95 pseudo-off state, or your notebook is in

Figure 2-14 Suspend/Resume Button

Page 51: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

40

P O I N T

Disabling the Suspend/Resume buttonprevents it from being used to put yournotebook in Suspend or Save-to-Diskmode. The resume function of the buttoncannot be disabled. (See the PowerSavings Menu of the BIOS setup utility,pages 95-100, for more information.)

P O I N T

If your notebook is active when youenter the Suspend or Save-to-Disk mode,changes to open files are not lost. Thefiles are left open and memory is keptactive during Suspend mode or thememory is transferred to the internalhard drive during Save-to-Disk mode.

PowerPanelPowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies providesWindows 95 desktop access to a comprehensivecombination of power management settingswithout entering the BIOS setup utility.

The PowerPanel icon looks like an atom withits cloud of electrons. This icon will open thePowerPanel menu. You can view the menu inicon format along the edge of your desktop bymoving the cursor against the edge whe re youhave chosen to keep your PowerPanel toolbarand letting it sit there until the toolbar appears.

C A U T I O N

The Suspend or Save-to-Disk modeshould not be used with certain PC Cards.Check your PC Card documentation formore information.

C A U T I O N

If you are running your notebook on battery power, be aware that the batterycontinues to discharge while your note-book is in suspend mode, though not asfast as when fully operational. With afully charged internal Lithium ion batterythe suspend mode will maintain your status for 24 hours or more.

C A U T I O N

Be sure you know which settings areactive for the Suspend/Resume buttonbefore you use it; misuse can result indata loss. (See the Power Savings Menuof the BIOS setup utility, pages 95-100,for more information.)

Save-to-Disk mode. (See pages 44-45.) Whenyou receive your LifeBook 700 Series it will beset to the default, which is Suspend mode.

Page 52: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

41

(The default position for the toolbar is the leftside of the screen, but you can move it towhichever edge you like by dragging.)

The power management toolbar has ten powerprofile choices and six activation choices.When you switch to AC powered operation thePowerPanel toolbar will automatically change toindicate AC power operation and will show theAC Power profile as active.

The profiles are groups of system settingsdesigned to fit power operation to specific useroperating conditions. The activations are short-cut ways to turn on specific power managementfeatures of your notebook. Some of the profilescan be edited and saved from the PowerPanelapplication, some can be edited and saved fromthe BIOS setup utility and only viewed fromPowerPanel,and some are factory set and canonly be viewed from either PowerPanel or theBIOS setup utility.

The profile choices are:

(This group is factory set.)

■ Maximum Battery Life.

■ Maximum Performance.

■ Power Management Off.

(This one is set only from the BIOS setup utility.)

■ Custom Settings.

(This group is set from PowerPanel.)

■ Presentation.

■ Green PC.

■ AC Profile.

■ Word Processing.

■ Communication.

■ Games.

The activation choices are:

■ System Suspend.

■ System Save-to-Disk.

■ System Standby.

P O I N T

The AC Power profile is activated auto-matically when a power adapter is beingused, unless it is overridden by anotherselection made after the adapter becameactive. It can be reactivated by selectingit or it can be activated by selection, evenwhen operating only on battery power.

■ Hard Disk Standby.

■ Modem Power Toggle.

■ Video Standby.

The factory set Maximum Power Savings profile is designed around trade offs of performanceand battery life. For truly maximum battery lifekeep the display and volume levels as low aspossible and use the custom settings recom-mended in Section Three on page 100.

Page 53: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

42

POWERPANEL ONLINE HELPTo access help with your p ower managementsettings,move your cursor to the PowerPaneltoolbar and right click. (See Clicking onpage 31.) From the menu that appears selectPowerPanel Help Topics.

POWERPANEL CUSTOMIZATIONTo modify your PowerPanel toolbar or createa custom toolbar, move your cursor to thePowerPanel toolbar and right click. From themenu that appears select Customize. Within theCustomize dialog box you can choose to havethe toolbar display at all times or to use yourcustom toolbar. You can also select from thesame menu to Hide the toolbar. If you hide thetoolbar you will have to double click on theedge where the toolbar was located to display it.

If you select Exit from the PowerPanel menuyou will turn off the PowerPanel completely. Toturn it back on, go to the Program folder of theStart menu,select PowerPanel and click on it.

MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE PROFILEThe Maximum Battery Life profile is a factoryinstalled combination of timeouts and otherpower savings parameters read directly fromthe BIOS,and chosen as the settings that willproduce the longest possible battery life.

MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE PROFILEThe Maximum Performance profile is a factoryinstalled combination of timeouts and otherpower savings parameters read directly fromthe BIOS and chosen as the settings that willproduce superior performance with reasonablebattery life.

POWER MANAGEMENT OFFTurns off power management control fromWindows 95 and PowerPanel and turns it overdirectly to the BIOS.

CUSTOM SETTINGS PROFILEThe Custom Settings profile has those powersaving parameters that you set in the BIOSsetup utility using the Power Savings MenuCustomize feature. (See Power Savings on pages 95-100.)

P O I N T

The Maximum Power Savings, MaximumPerformance, and Power ManagementOff profiles are read only. The CustomSettings Profile can only be changedfrom the BIOS setup Utility.

PRESENTATION PROFILEThe Presentation profile is the same combina-tion of timeouts and other power savings para-meters as the Maximum Battery Life profileexcept that the display is never turned off.(This profile was designed to enhance the use of your notebook for slide showstyle presentations.)

GREEN PC PROFILEThe Green PC profile has the Video timeoutand the Hard Drive timeout enabled but nostandby or suspension modes enabled.

Page 54: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

43

AC PROFILEThe AC power profile has all timeouts disabledand no other power management featuresenabled. This profile is activated automaticallyby plugging in a power adapter.

WORD PROCESSING PROFILEThe Word Processing profile is a factoryinstalled combination of timeouts and otherpower savings parameters chosen as the settingsthat will produce superior performance withreasonable battery life when using your note-book for doing word processing.

COMMUNICATION PROFILEThe Communication profile is a factoryinstalled combination of timeouts and otherpower savings parameters chosen as the settingsthat will produce superior performance withreasonable battery life when using your note-book with the modem active such as duringInternet,fax or speakerphone activities.

GAMES PROFILEThe Games profile is a factory installed combi-nation of timeouts and other power savingsparameters chosen as the settings that will pro-duce superior performance with reasonable bat-tery life when playing games on your notebook.

SYSTEM SUSPEND ACTIVATIONClicking on the Suspend button or selectingSystem Suspend on the PowerPanel menu willput your notebook in Suspend mode. Pressingthe Suspend/Resume button turns the powerback on and lets you begin where you left off.(See Figure 2-14 on page 39, and Suspend Modeon pages 44 and 95.)

SYSTEM SAVE-TO-DISK ACTIVATIONClicking on the Save-to-Disk button or select-ing System Save to Disk on the PowerPanelmenu will put your notebook in Save-to-Diskmode. Your notebook will be left in theWindows 95 pseudo-off state. If the powerswitch is not turned off your notebook can berestarted by pressing the Suspend/Resume but-ton which will cause the system memory to

reload from the hard drive and let you beginwhere you left off. (See Figure 2-14 on page 39,and Save-to-Disk Mode on pages 44-45.)

SYSTEM STANDBY ACTIVATIONClicking on the System Standby button orselecting System Standby on the PowerPanelmenu will put your notebook in Standby mode.You can return your notebook to normal opera-tion by performing any activity such as pressinga key or touching the ErgoTrac pointing device.

HARD DISK STANDBY ACTIVATIONClicking on the Hard Disk Standby button orselecting Hard Disk Standby on the PowerPanelmenu will turn off your internal hard drive. Youcan return your notebook to normal operationby performing any hard drive operation.

MODEM POWER TOGGLEClicking on the Modem Power Toggle button or selecting Modem Power Toggle onthe PowerPanel menu will turn the power toyour modem on or off. To turn it to the othercondition select Modem Power Toggle again.

Page 55: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

44

■ Selecting System Suspend from thePowerPanel toolbar or menu.

■ Timing out from lack of activity.

■ Battery level reaching the Dead BatteryWarning condition.

Your notebook’s system memory typically storesthe file(s) on which you are working, the openapplication(s) and any other data required tosupport the operation(s) in progress. Whenyou resume operation from Suspend mode,itreturns to the point in the operation where itleft off. You must use the Suspend/Resumebutton to resume operation, and there mustbe an adequate power source available, oryour notebook will not resume.

Save-to-Disk ModeThe Save-to-Disk function saves the contents ofyour notebook’s system memory to the harddrive whenever you:

■ Press the Suspend/Resume button untilacknowledged with Save-to-Disk modeenabled from the Power Savings menu of theBIOS setup utility.

■ Select Suspend from the Windows 95 Startmenu with Save-to-Disk mode enabled bythe BIOS setup utility.

■ Select Save-to-Disk activation from thePowerPanel toolbar or menu.

■ Time out from lack of activity with Save-To-Disk mode enabled from the Power Savingsmenu of the BIOS setup utility.

Your noteboo k’s sys tem mem ory typ i c a lly store sthe file(s) on wh i ch you are work i n g, the opena pp l i c a ti on(s) and any other data requ i red tosu pport the opera ti on(s) in progre s s . Wh en theSave - to - Disk functi on is activa ted your noteboo ks aves the con tents of the sys tem mem ory to a fil e

VIDEO STANDBY ACTIVATIONClicking on the Video Standby button or select-ing Video Standby on the PowerPanel menuturns off the power to the display. You canreturn your notebook to normal operation byperforming any activity such as pressing a keyor touching the ErgoTrac pointing device.

Suspend ModeThe Suspend mode saves the contents of yournotebook’s system memory during periods ofinactivity by maintaining power to critical partswhile turning off the CPU, the display, the harddrive and all of the other internal componentsexcept those necessary to maintain systemmemory, recognize the Suspend/ Resume but-ton and restart. Your notebook can be put inSuspend mode by:

■ Pressing the Suspend/Resume buttonuntil acknowledged.

■ Selecting Suspend from the Windows 95Start Menu.

C A U T I O N

Loss of all power sources, including batteries, while in the Suspend mode willcause lost data and inability to re t u rn to operation with the Suspend/Resume button.

Page 56: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

45

on the internal hard drive , and then autom a ti c a l-ly shuts of f power to your noteboo k . This is thesame pseu do - of f s t a te as the Wi n dows 95 powerof f . Wh en you re sume opera ti on by pressing theSu s pen d / Re sume but ton , you retu rn to the poi n tin the opera ti on wh ere you left of f , before goi n gi n to Save - to - Disk mode .

P O I N T

If power is lost during Save-to-Disk modethe data will be retrieved automatically assoon as power is re t u rn e d .

P O I N T

When PC Cards or external devices arein use, Save-to-Disk mode cannot returnto the exact state prior to suspension,because all of the peripheral devices willbe re-initialized when the system restarts.

P O I N T

The main advantage of using the Save-to-Disk function is that power is not re q u i red to maintain your data. This is particularly important if you will beleaving your notebook in a suspendedstate for a prolonged period of time. Thedrawback of using Save-to-Disk mode is that it lengthens the power down andpower up sequences and resets peripheral devices.

P O I N T

Save-to-Disk mode requires allocating asignificant amount of hard drive capacityfor saving all system memory, whichreduces your usable disk space. Whenyou purchase your notebook it will havespace allocated for the memory installed.If you upgrade the original system byadding a memory upgrade modulewithout changing the size of your Save-to-Disk allocation you will get an error message when you try to activate Save-to-Disk mode and it will not work. Usethe PHDISK Utility to increase the sizeof the Save-to-Disk file, SAVE2DSK.BIN.(Refer to Setting Up Your Save-to-DiskFile Allocation on pages 112-113 for more information.) If you need help contact your support representative for recommendations.

Page 57: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

46

operation automatically. This feature is inde-pendent of the Suspend/Resume button. Thisparameter is enabled and disabled in the BIOSsetup utility.

Video TimeoutThe Video Timeout is one of the power man-agement parameters which saves power byturning off the display if there is no keyboardor pointer activity for the user selected timeoutperiod. Any keyboard or pointer activity willcause the display to restart automatically. Thisfeature is independent of the Suspend/Resumebutton. This parameter is enabled and disabledin the BIOS setup utility. (See page 96.)

Hard Disk TimeoutThe Hard Disk Timeout is one of the powermanagement parameters which saves powerby turning off the hard drive if there is no harddrive access for the timeout period which hasbeen set in the BIOS setup utility. (See page 96.)

Idle ModeIdle mode is one of the power managementparameters. When Idle mode is enabled theCPU is put into low-speed operation whenthere is no activity (keystroke, pointer action,sound generation, video display change,modem transmission or reception, etc.) on yournotebook for 16 seconds. Any activity will causethe normal operation to restart automatically.This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button. This parameter is enabledand disabled in the BIOS setup utility.(See page 96.)

Standby ModeStandby mode is one of the power managementparameters. When Standby mode is activated,your notebook puts the CPU in low-sp eedoperation,shuts off the display and turns offthe hard drive when there is no activity (key-stroke, pointer action, sound generation, videodisplay change, modem transmission or recep-tion, etc.) on your notebook for the user select-ed time-out period. (See page 97.) Any activitywill cause your notebook to return to normal

Any attempt to access the hard drive will causethe hard drive to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button. This parameter is enabledand disabled in the BIOS setup utility.

Windows 95 Control PanelThe Power icon in the Wi n dows 95 Con tro lPa n el all ows you to en a ble or disable all thepower managem ent set ti n gs wh i ch can be madef rom the de s k top. Sel ecting “All ow Wi n dows tom a n a ge power use on this com p uter ”a ll ows theopera ting sys tem to en a ble Phoenix Tech n o l ogi e sPower Pa n el and Wi n dows 95 Con trol panel s et ti n gs . Wh en Wi n dows 95 power managem en tis disabl ed the BIOS setup uti l i ty set ti n gs wi llcon trol your power saving para m eters .(See pa ges 95-100 for the BIOS setup uti l i ty Power Savi n gs menu.)

The Windows 95 Control Panel PowerManagement dialog box lets you set differenthard drive timeouts for battery and AC poweroperation and to set PC Card modempower parameters.

Page 58: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

47

P O I N T

You must restart your notebook forWindows 95 Control panel settingchanges to take affect.

infrared ports are directly facing each otherwithout obstructions.A distance of 6" to 36"between the device ports is ideal. Dirt orscratches on the lens of your notebook or theother device will degrade performance. This isespecially true for Fast IrDA applications suchas a transfer to an Ethernet.

LapLink software can be used for Infraredfile transfers. See your online help formore information.

C A U T I O N

Do not move either device during communication as it may interruptdata transmission.

INTERNAL MODEMYour internal modem is a fax/data/voicemodem controlled by Windows 95,LapLink,MegaPhone or other software. The voice func-tions of the modem include speakerphone andanswering machine capabilities. The answeringmachine capabilities require the use of thirdparty software not included with your note-book. The other features are accessible viaWindows 95,LapLink or MegaPhone.

INFRARED PORTInfrared IrDA-compatible communicationis a function that allows for wireless data transfer between your notebook and otherIrDA-compatible devices. Examples of IrDA-compatible devices are another computer or aprinter. When carrying out this kind of com-munication, both devices must be set so their

C A U T I O N

Be careful not to scratch the infrared portlens. Scratches, dirt or other surfacemarks can effect operation.

C A U T I O N

The internal modem is not intended foruse with Digital PBX systems. Do notconnect the internal modem to a digitalPBX as it may cause serious damage tothe internal modem or your entire note-book. Consult your PBX manufacturer’sdocumentation for details. Some hotelshave Digital PBX systems. Be sure to findout BEFORE you connect your modemdisplay capabilities.

Page 59: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

P O I N T

You can modify the set up of certainaudio parameters in the BIOS setuputility, Advanced Menu – MultimediaDevice Configuration Submenu. (See page 77.)

S e c t i o n T w o

48

The following conditions may interfere withinfrared communications:

■ When the infrared communication portsare not directly facing each other, or someobstacle is between them.

■ When the infrared communication ports aretoo far apart.

■ When a television or radio remote controlunit, or a wireless headphone is beingused nearby.

■ When a strong light such as direct sunlight,fluorescent light, or incandescent light shineson the port.

PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWAREYour LifeBook 700 Series comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and videofiles of various formats. In addition there isfile transfer software, telephony software,virus protection software,and warm-dockswapping software.

All of the pre-installed software can be accessedfrom the Program folder of the Windows 95Start menu. If you aren’t sure what software ispre-installed check the Program folder. If youneed assistance with an individual applicationuse their online help.

SoftPEG MPEG File PlayerThe MPEG file player displays a screen to findthe file which you wish to play. You can setupthe list to select from limited to particular typesof files or display all files. Opening the desiredfile will play it. Online help screens are availablefor more information.(Located in theMultimedia Software folder.)

SoftPEG Video CD PlayerThis control resembles a VCR player front paneland is operated in the same way. When youpoint to a button, a small explanation of the useof the button will appear. When you left-clickon the button it will activate.Online help screens are available for moreinformation. (Located in the MultimediaSoftware folder.)

P O I N T

You can access all pre-installed softwarefrom categorized menu folders in theStart menu; Communications software(LapLink & Megaphone), MultimediaSoftware (AudioRack & SoftPEG), Serviceand Support software (McAfee VirusScan& PC-Doctor), and System ManagementSoftware (Tioman & PowerPanel).

Page 60: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

49

P O I N T

For maximum frequency response andbandwidth, leave the graphic equalizerlevels at the mid-point (zero level). Tocustomize the frequency response toyour personal taste, adjust accordingly.

ESS AudioRackThe control of the AudioRack player software(AudioRack32) resembles the front panels ofa rack of stereo equipment and is operated inmuch the same way. There is also AudioRackrecorder software (AudioRecorder).Onlinehelp screens are accessible from the AudioDrivepanel of AudioRack32, click on the Help buttonfor more information. In the AudioRecorderdialog box, click on Help in the top taskbar.

In AudioRack32 the AudioDrive panel lets you turn on and off the available functions.When you left-click on a button it will activate.When a function is active, its button on theAudioDrive shows a green dot and its controlpanel is in the equipment rack. When it is offthe dot on the button is black and the controlpanel is not in the rack. You activate a slider orknob on a control panel by dragging it. Thefunctions available are DAT (Digital Audio Tapeplayer),3D (3D-Stereo sound control),MIDI,Mixer and CD (Audio CD player).

C A U T I O N

The ESS AudioRack volume settings set the maximum volume level of thehardware volume control knob forthat function.

C A U T I O N

If you use a speakerphone function, besure that the microphone setting in theESS AudioRack is disabled.

LapLinkLapLink, by Traveling Software, file transfersoftware provides direct file transfers to othercomputers.Data transfers can be via internalmodem, a PC Card modem,the infrared port,a serial cable, or a parallel cable (cables arenot included). See the LapLink online helpscreens for operating instructions.

MegaPhoneMegaPhone, by AVEO, Inc.,is telephonysoftware which provides access to the voiceand fax features of your notebook’s internalmodem. It features dialing, speakerphone,and fax functions. See your MegaPhone online help screens for guidance in operatingthe MegaPhone software.

Page 61: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

50

P O I N T

For optimum speakerphone performance: ■ Speak clearly.■ Limit background noise.■ Speak facing the keyboard from about

one (1) foot away.

McAfee VirusScanRunning your McAfee VirusScan program afterloading data or programs from a floppy disk,CD-ROM,modem data transfer, or infrareddata transfer is a precaution that will protectthe data on your hard dr ive from contamina-tion or destruction. See your VirusScan onlinehelp screens for information on how and whento run this program.

AGATÉ TIOMAN PRO-SWAPTioman allows you to warm-swap yourLifebook 700 Series peripheral devices inthe Multi-function bays of your notebook.Tioman will put the system into suspendmode permitting the swapping of a device.After resuming the system,the new deviceis automatically detected.

Tioman supports warm-swapping of the following devices:

■ Optional Second 3.2GB hard drive.

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive.

■ Optional Zip drive.

■ 20-speed maximum CD-ROM drive.

■ Lithium ion Battery.

Using TiomanTioman allows you to exchange removabledevices without restarting the system byputting the system in suspend mode beforeyou swap the device. Press the resume buttonand the system will automatically detect the

new device. The software will automaticallycreate drive letter(s) and list the dr ive under‘My Computer’and ‘Windows Explorer’. Thetaskbar icon and the ToolTip balloon will beupdated to reflect the current device insertedin the bay.

Device ToolTip balloon

Second HDD Hard drive in bay(Multi-function Bay 2 only)

FDD Diskette drive in bayZip drive Removable drive in bayCD-ROM CD-ROM drive in bay

(Multi-function Bay 2 only)Battery No device in bay

Tioman Taskbar IconOnce the Tioman software in installed on yoursystem and Windows 95 is running, small iconsare displayed in the lower right hand corner ofthe taskbar. The left icon corresponds to Multi-function Bay 1 and the right icon to Multi-function Bay 2. The taskbar icons are your gateway into the capabilities of Tioman.

Page 62: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

51

The icons provide a visual cue for the currentinserted device. You will immediately noticewhether a Floppy Disk drive, Secondary Harddrive,CD-ROM drive or Zip drive is inserted inthe bay. Hover over the icon with the cursorand the ToolTip balloon will display the nameof the inserted device.

Right-clicking on the icon will display theTioman menu which offers items for swappingdevices, getting help, and providing informa-tion about the Tioman software.

Removing DevicesTo remove the current device from the bay:

1. Close any open files on the removable devicethat you plan to eject from the computer.

2. Right-click on the Tioman taskbar icon todisplay its menu.

3. Select the ‘Swap Device’ menu item.

4. The ‘Agate Tioman ProSwap for Fujitsu’ win-dow will come up asking if you wish to sus-pend the machine in order to swap thedevice. Select ‘yes’.

5. You can now safely remove the device fromyour notebook without damage to thenotebook or the device.

6. References to the device’s drive letter listedunder ‘My Computer’and ‘WindowsExplorer’ will automatically be removed.

7. The taskbar icon and its ToolTip balloon willbe updated to reflect the new device insertedin the bay.

Inserting DevicesTo insert a device into the bay:

1. Your notebook should already be in suspendmode. If it is not, proceed to the ‘RemovingDevices’ section and follow the steps tosuspend the computer. Failure to do socan cause damage to your computer orthe device.

2. You can now safely insert the device into thebay of the notebook without any damage.

3. Press the resume button which will reactivatethe notebook from suspend mode.

4. The software will automatically detect thenew device and place it online.

5. Depending on the device, one or more driveletter(s) will automatically be created andlisted under ‘My Computer’and ‘WindowsExplorer’.

6. The taskbar icon and its ToolTip balloon willbe updated to reflect the new device insertedin the bay.

Control PanelTioman adds a Control Panel application called‘Device Bay’ to your system. You can use this todisplay information about the bay and theinserted devices. You may also insert andremove devices as described in the previoussection, using the button within the DeviceBay dialog.

Uninstalling Tioman1. Open the Control Panel folder located under

‘My Computer’.

2. Open the ‘Add/Remove Programs’ icon.

Page 63: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T w o

52

3. Select the Agate Tioman entry from the list ofcurrently installed programs.

4. Click on the Add/Remove button to launchthe uninstall application.

5. The setup wizard will guide you through therest of the uninstall process.

6. Tioman software will be removed completely,the next time Windows 95 is started.

Secondary Hard Drive Swap LimitationsIf you ever boot with the second HDD installedin Multi-function Bay 2 and try to swap it,anerror message “Removing INT 13 Devices is notsupported...” appears. This error occurs becauseWindows configured the hard drive as an INT13 drive and remembers the setting in theRegistry. The following steps are required toenable the Tioman Proswap software to swapout the second HDD.

When you see the swap failure message performthe following steps:

• Boot system without the second HDD

• Swap in the second HDD

• Go into Control Panel/System/DeviceManager

• Look under Disk Drives

• Select the second HDD and open properties

• Select the settings tab, in the options box

• Uncheck the INT 13 box

• Select OK, BUT DO NOT RESTART

• Shutdown system and turn the powerswitch to off.

• Without the second HDD in system, turnthe power switch to on .

You must perform these steps every time the INT 13 box becomes checked onboot detection.

P O I N T

When the external Floppy Disk Drive isattached to the notebook, a battery is inMulti-function Bay 1 and any device is inMulti-function Bay 2, the taskbar icon forMulti-function Bay 1 will show ‘Diskettedrive in bay’ and Multi-function Bay 2’sicon will show the correct device. If youremove the external Floppy Disk Driveand suspend/resume the system, thetaskbar icons for Multi-function Bay 1and Multi-function Bay 2 will now showthe correct devices.

P O I N T

When a battery is in Multi-function Bay1 and a Floppy Disk Drive is in Multi-function Bay 2, the taskbar icon forMulti-function Bay 1 will show ‘Diskettedrive in bay’ and the Multi-function Bay2 icon will show ‘No Device in bay’.

Page 64: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Conf iguring Your LifeBook 700 SeriesS e c t i o n T h r e e

Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Identifying the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

BIOS Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . . 57

Main Menu – Setting StandardSystem Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Advanced Menu – Setting Device Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Security Menu – Setting the Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Power Menu – Setting Power Management Feature Controls . . . . . . 95

Boot Menu – Selecting the Operating System Source . . . . . . . . . 103

Info Menu – Displaying BasicSystem Information. . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility . . . . 109

Setting Up Your Save-To-Disk File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Page 65: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

54

SECTION THREECONFIGURING YOUR LIFEBOOK700 SERIES FROM FUJITSUThis section explains the BIOS setup utility.The BIOS setup utility is required to set thedate, time, power management modes,datasecurity passwords and other operatingparameters of your notebook.

BOOT SEQUENCEEach time you power up or restart yourLifeBook 700 Series,it goes through a quietboot sequence that displays a Fujitsu logo untilyour operating system is loaded. During quietboot, your notebook is performing a standardboot sequence including a Power On Self Test(POST). To access the ability to change thedrive that will be used for finding the operatingsystem, press the Esc key anytime while theFujitsu logo is displayed. To enter the BIOSsetup utility press the F2 key anytime whilethe Fujitsu logo is displayed. When the bootsequence is completed without a failure andwithout a request for the setup utility, the

IDENTIFYING THE DRIVESYour notebook uses drive letters (Example A:,B:,C:,D:,E:) to identify internal and externaldevices such as hard drives, floppy disk drives,CD-ROM drives and PC Cards. The most com-monly assigned drive designators are listedbelow. If you add other devices,the drive desig-nators may be different. See your operating system manual for setting drive designations.

Drive DesignatorsA:Floppy disk drive.

Installable in either of the multi-functionbays of your notebook, or use the externalfloppy disk drive.

B: Not used with your notebook.

P O I N T

The BIOS setup utility is entered bypressing the F2 key during the bootprocess while the Fujitsu logo is onthe screen.

system displays the Windows 95 openingscreen. The boot sequence is executed when:

■ You turn on power to the system using thepower switch on the right side panel of yournotebook. (Figure 2-5 on page 23.)

■ You restart your computer from theWindows 95 Shutdown dialog box of theStart Menu.

■ The software initiates a system restart.Example: When you install a newapplication.

■ You reset the system by pressing the threekeys Ctrl+Alt+Del at the same time and thenrestart your computer from the Windows 95Shutdown dialog box.

P O I N T

When error messages occur seeSection Five, pages 138-140, for help in understanding the meaning andrequired actions to be taken.

Page 66: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

55

C A U T I O N

A bootable CD-ROM may have either afloppy disk format or a hard drive form a t .When using a bootable CD-ROM, drivedesignations will automatically changea c c o rding to which format is used. (See page 64 for more inform a t i o n . )

C: Hard drive.Installed inside your notebook.

D:CD-ROM drive or optional secondhard drive. Installable in Multi-function

Bay 2 of your notebook.

The setup utility configures:

■ Standard system parameters, such as dateand time.

■ Device control feature parameters, such asI/O addresses and boot devices.

■ Power Management parameters that help toconserve your notebook’s batteries.

■ System Data Security feature parameters,such as passwords.

You will only have to change the utility settingsif you want to:

■ Change the date or time. (You can alsodo this without entering the setup utility,through your operating system. See youroperating system manual.)

■ Change the primary boot device.

■ Change the power management parametersettings. (For a more convenient process, seethe PowerPanel on pages 40-44.)

■ Change a port address or other parameter.

■ Change an audio parameter setting.

■ Change the selection of whether to use thebuilt-in display, an external monitor or both.(For a more convenient process, see the Fn keyon page 33.)

■ Change the system data security settings.

Routinely Entering the Setup UtilityYou can enter the setup utility whenever youturn on or reset the system. To do this:

1. Allow the system to start booting.

2. As soon as the Fujitsu logo appears on thescreen, press the F2 key.

3. The Main menu of the setup utility thenappears with the current settings of theparameters displayed.

4. If you wish to go to one o f the other setupmenus, press the Ó or the È key to find themenu you require.

BIOS SETUP UTILITYThe BIOS setup utility is a program that setsthe operating environment for your notebook.It is referred to in this publication as the setuputility. There is no need to set or change theenvironment to operate as it is set at the factoryfor normal operating conditions.

Page 67: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

56

1. When you turn on or restart the c omputerthere is a beep and/or the following messageappears on the screen:

Error message - please runSETUP programPress <F1> key to continue, <F2>to run SETUP

2. If an error message is displayed on thescreen,and you want to continue with theboot process and start the operating systemanyway, press the F1 key.

P O I N T

If your data security settings require it,you may be asked for a password beforethe operating system will be opened.

P O I N T

If your data security settings require it,you may be asked for a password beforethe Main menu will appear.

C A U T I O N

If your notebook beeps a series of beeps that sounds like a code and thedisplay is blank, please refer to theTroubleshooting Section. (See page 152.)The Troubleshooting Section includesa list of error messages and theirmeanings. (See pages 158-160.)

3. If an error message is displayed on thescreen, and you want to enter the setuputility, press the F2 key.

4 . Wh en the setup uti l i ty starts with a fault pre-s en t , the sys tem displays the fo ll owing message :

W a r n i n g !

Error message

[ C o n t i n u e ]

5. Press any key to enter the setup utility. Thesystem will then display the Main Menu withcurrent parameters values.

Entering the Setup Utility After aConfiguration Change or System FailureIf there has been a change in the system config-uration that does not agree with the parametersettings stored in your BIOS memory, or thereis a failure in the system,the system beepsand/or displays an error message after thePower On Self Test (POST). If the failure is not too severe,it will give you the opportunityto modify the settings of the setup utility, asdescribed in the following steps:

Page 68: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

57

NAVIGATING THROUGHTHE SETUP UTILITYThe BIOS setup utility consists of six menus;MAIN,ADVANCED, SECURITY, POWERSAVINGS,BOOT and EXIT. The remainderof Section Three explains each menu in turnincluding all submenus and setup items.

The following procedures allow you to navigatethe setup utility menus:

1. To select a menu, use the cursor keys: Ó , È.

2. To select a field within a menu or a sub-menu,use the cursor keys: Õ, Ô.

3. To select the different values for each field,press the Spacebar or + to change to the nexthigher selection and F5 or - to go to the nextlower selection.

4. To activate a submenu press the Enter key.

P O I N T

Selecting a field causes a help messageabout that field to be displayed on theright-hand side of the screen

P O I N T

Pressing the Enter key with the highlighton a selection that is not a submenu orauto selection will cause a list of alloptions for that item to be displayed.Pressing the Enter key or Esc key willselect the highlighted choice andremove the list.

7.Pressing the F9 key resets all items in thecurrent menu to the default values.

8. Pressing the F10 key saves the currentconfiguration and exits the BIOS SetupUtility. You will be asked to verify thisselection before it is executed.

9. Pressing the F1 key gives you a generalhelp screen.

5. To return to a menu from a submenu, pressthe Esc key.

6. To go to the Exit menu from any othermenu, press the Esc key.

P O I N T

The BIOS Setup screens depicted in thismanual are only representations of theactual setup screens. The BIOS Setupscreens on your notebook may vary.

Page 69: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

58

Figure 3-1 Main Menu

MAIN MENU – SETTINGSTANDARD SYSTEM PARAMETERSThe Main Menu allows you to set or view thecurrent system parameters. Follow the instruc-tions for Navigating Through The Setup Utilityto make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-1 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Main menu,all of the options for eachfield,the default settings and a descrip tion ofthe field’s function and any special informationneeded to help understand the field’s use.

P O I N T

System Time and System Date canalso be set from your operating systemwithout using the setup utility. Use thecalendar and time icon on your Controlpanel for Windows 95 or type time ordate from the MS-DOS prompt.

Page 70: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

59

Menu Field Options Default Description

System Time: — — Sets and displays the current time. Time is in a 24 hour format of hours:minutes:seconds with 2 digits for each.(HH:MM:SS).Example: 16:45:57. You may change each segment of the time separately. Move between the segments with the Tab key and/orShift + Tab keys.

System Date: — — Sets and displays the current date. Date is in a month/day/yearnumeric format with 2 digits each for month and day and 4 digitsfor year. (MM/DD/YYYY) for example: 03/20/1996. You maychange each segment of the date separately. Move between thesegments with the Tab key and/or Shift + Tab keys.

Legacy Diskette A: 1.44/1.25 MB 3 1/2"; Disabled. [1.44/1.25 MB 3 1/2"] Sets the format for floppy disk drive A if it is installed.

Primary Master: Selects Primary Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is Master submenu. one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Master submenu

allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.

Primary Slave: Selects Primary Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface,if there is Slave submenu. one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Master submenu

allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.

Table 3-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu

Page 71: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

60

Table 3-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu

Secondary Master: Selects Secondary [UJDA110] Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is Master submenu. one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Master submenu

allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.

System Memory: 640 KB Displays the size of system memory, which is detectedautomatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.

Extended Memory: 31 MB Displays the size of extended memory which is detectedautomatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.

Memory Cache: Selects the memory — Allows you to set your system to use external memory cache.cache submenu.

Language: English (US); Japanese (JP). [English (US)] The default setting differs between the US/Europeanand the Japanese model. Selects the display language for the BIOS.

Menu Field Options Default Description

Page 72: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

61

Primary Master – SubmenuThe Primary Master/Slave, Secondary Mastersubmenus are identical for hard drives. Theyhave the capacity displayed at the top of thescreen as well as on Main menu. Follow theinstructions for Navigating Through the SetupUtility to make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-2 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Primary Master submenu,all of theoptions for each field, the default settings anda description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-2 Primary Master/Slave, Secondary Master Submenus

Page 73: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

62

Menu Field Options Default Description

Type: Auto; None;CD-ROM; [Auto] Selects the ATA/ATAPI device type. Select Auto to have the typeATAPI Removable; User. automatically identified by the BIOSat POST. If None is selected,

all of the following Set-up items do not appear. Select CD-ROMif a CD-ROM drive is installed at this connection. If User is selected, you must specify the number of Cylinders, Heads,and Sectors for the drive. Select ATAPI Removable if a removable disk drive is installed at this connection.

Cylinders: A number between 0 This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is and 65,535. identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,

you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing (pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.

Heads: A number between 1 and 16. This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing (pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.

Sectors: A number between 0 and 63. This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing (pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.

Table 3-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master/Slave, Secondary Master Submenus

Page 74: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

63

Menu Field Options Default Description

Maximum Capacity: Display only. — Displays the maximum capacity of the drive calculated from the parameters of the hard disk when Auto is selected and the typeis identified as hard disk, or User is selected.

Multi-Sector Transfers: Disabled; 2; 4; 8;16. — This option cannot be changed when Auto is selected.Specify the MAX 32;MAX 64;MAX 128. number of sectors per block for multiple sector transfer. MAX

refers to the size the disk returns when required.

LBA Mode Control: Enabled; Disabled. — Enables or disables logical Block Addressing in place of Cylinder,Head, Sector addressing. This option cannot be changed whenAuto is selected.

Transfer Mode: Standard, Fast PIO 1; Fast PIO 2 — Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. AutotypeFast PIO 3; Fast PIO 4; the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This optionFast PIO 3 / DMA; cannot be changed when Auto is selected. Multi-word DMA Fast PIO 4 / DMA. is automatically set to mode 1 for Fast PIO 1, Fast PIO 2,

Fast PIO 3,and set to mode 2 for Fast PIO 4 / DMA.

Ultra DMA Mode: Disabled; Mode 0; — Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. AutotypeMode 1; Mode 2. the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This option

cannot be changed when Auto is selected.

Table 3-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master/Slave, Secondary Master Submenus

Page 75: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

64

C A U T I O N

A bootable CD-ROM may have eithera floppy disk format or a hard drive format. When the bootable CD-ROM is used the drive allocations change automatically without changing the BIOS setup. If a floppy disk format CD-ROM is used the CD-ROM becomesDrive A. If a hard disk format CD-ROMis used the internal hard drive becomesDrive D and the CD-ROM becomesDrive C and all other drive designationsshift as necessary. The boot sequenceignores the new drive designations, however, your application softwarewill use the new designations.

C A U T I O N

Be careful of the operating environmentwhen booting from a CD-ROM or youmay overwrite files by mistake.

Page 76: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

65

Memory Cache – SubmenuThe Memory Cache submenu provides the ability to enable or disable external cache memory for your processor. Follow the instruc-tions for Navigating Through the Setup Utilityto make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-3 shows the names of the menu fields forthe Memory Cache submenu, all the options foreach field,the default settings and a descriptionof the field’s function and any special informa-tion needed to help understand the field’s use.

Figure 3-3 Memory Cache Submenu of the Main Menu

Page 77: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

66

Menu Field Options Default DescriptionExternal Cache: Enabled; Disabled. [Enabled] Turns external memory cache on and off.

Table 3-3 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Memory Cache Submenu

Exiting from the Main MenuWhen you have finished setting the parameterson this menu, you can either exit from thesetup utility, or move to another menu. If youwish to exit from the setup utility, press the Esc key or use the cursor keys to go to the Exit menu. If you wish to move to anothermenu,use the cursor keys. See NavigatingThrough the Setup Utility on page 57 formore information.

Page 78: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

67

Table 3-4 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Advanced Menu,all of the options foreach field, the default settings and a description

of the field’s function and any special informa-tion needed to help understand the field’s use.

ADVANCED MENU – SETTING DEVICE FEATURE CONTROLSThe Advanced Menu allows you to:

■ Enable or disable support for Plug & Playoperating systems.

■ Enable or disable BIOS support for ACPI.

■ Set the I/O addresses for the serial and parallel ports.

■ Set the communication mode for the parallel port.

■ Set an audio function I/O address,interruptlevel and DMA channel.

■ Select between the display panel and anexternal CRT display.

■ Enable or disable compensation foryour display.

■ Configure PCI devices in your system.

Follow the instructions for Navigating Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Figure 3-4 Advanced Menu

Page 79: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Table 3-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Menu

S e c t i o n T h r e e

68

Menu Field Options Default Description

Plug & Play O/S: Yes; No. [Yes] Select Yes if you are using a Plug & Play capable operating system.Select No if you need the BIOS to configure non-boot devices.

Secure Setup Yes; No. [No] Yes prevents a Plug & Play operating system from changing Configuration: system settings.

I/O Device When selected, opens the I/O Device Configuration submenuConfiguration: which allows the user to modify settings for parallel and serial

ports, the floppy disk controller, and the local bus IDE adapter.

Keyboard/Mouse Features: When selected, opens the Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu,which allows setting external and internal keyboard andmouse parameters.

Multimedia Device When selected, opens the Multimedia Device ConfigurationConfiguration: submenu, which allows setting the hardware address and

interrupt levels of audio functions and enabling or disabling the MIDI/joystick port.

Video Features: When selected, opens the Video Features submenu, which allowsetting of the display parameters,including routing of videosignals to different displays.

Page 80: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

69

Table 3-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced MenuMenu Field Options Default Description

PCI Configuration: When selected, opens additional menus to configure PCI devices.

DMI Event Logging: When selected, opens the DMI event logging configuration menu.

ACPI Features: When selected, opens the ACPI features menu, which allowsenabling and disabling ACPI BIOS.

Page 81: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

70

Figure 3-5 I/O Device Configuration Submenu

C A U T I O N

I/O addresses, DMA channels andI n t e rrupt levels can be entered in variousways, including via the BIOS setup utility,the control software for the I/O device, orthe hard w a re. If any two ports or devices,serial or parallel, have the same I/Oa d d ress assigned your notebook will notfunction norm a l l y. Please keep a re c o rd of original settings before making anychanges in the event that a restoration isre q u i red. See your hard w a re and softwaredocumentation as well as the setup utilityto determine settings, limitations, etc.

I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced MenuThe I/O Device Configuration submenuprovides the ability to set the I/O addresses andinterrupt levels for the parallel and serial ports,and disk drive controllers of your notebook.Follow the instructions for Navigating Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Page 82: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

71

Table 3-5 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the I/O Device Configuration submenu,allof the options for each field,the default settingsand a description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

P O I N T

All I/O addresses in Table 3-5 are inhexadecimal.

P O I N T

To prevent IRQ and address conflicts,avoid changing the default settings. If you must change the settings, you can call 1-800-8FUJITSU for technical assistance.

C A U T I O N

The BIOS will warn you of a resourceconflict by placing a yellow asterisk nextto each device that is in conflict.

Page 83: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

72

Menu Field Options Default Description

Serial Port A: Disabled;Enabled; Auto. [Enabled] Configures the serial port A using either no configuration(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or byallowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).

Base I/O address: 3F8; 2F8; 3E8;2E8. [3F8] Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when portA is Enabled.

Interrupt: IRQ 3; IRQ 4; [IRQ 4] Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port AIRQ 10; IRQ 11. is Enabled.

Serial Port B: Disabled; Enabled; Auto. [Enabled] Configures the serial port A using either no configuration(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or byallowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).

Mode: IrDA; FIR. [FIR] Allows user to set the se rial port mode when port B is Enabled.

Base I/O address: 3F8;2F8; 3E8;2E8. [2E8] Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when p ort B is Enabled.

Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Page 84: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

73

Menu Field Options Default Description

Interrupt: IRQ 3; IRQ 4; [IRQ 3] Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port B IRQ 10; IRQ 11. is Enabled.

Base I/O address: 100; 108;110; 118. [118] When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR,this option isavailable allowing the user to set the base I/O address for theFIR of serial port B.

DMA channel: DMA 1;DMA 3. [DMA 3] When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR,this option isavailable allowing the user to set the DMA channel for theFIR of serial port B.

Parallel port: Disabled;Enabled; Auto. [Enabled] Configures the parallel port using either no configuration(Disabled),a user defined configuration (Enabled), or byallowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).

Mode: Output Only; [Bi-directional] When the parallel port is enabled this option is available allowing Bi-directional; ECP. the user to set the mode for the parallel port. Bi-directional allows

two-way transfer of information between your notebook and aconnected parallel device. Output Only (Half Duplex) allowsinformation to be transferred in only one direction, from yournotebook to the printer or similar device.ECP Mode allowscommunication with the ECP class of parallel I/O devices.

Page 85: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

74

Menu Field Options Default Description

Base I/O address: 378; 278;3BC. [378] Allows user to set the parallel port base I/O address when the parallel port is Enabled.

Interrupt: IRQ 5; IRQ 7. [IRQ 7] Allows user to set the parallel port interrupt when the parallelport is Enabled.

Floppy disk controller: Disabled;Enabled; Auto. [Enabled] Enables and disables the floppy disk drive controller for bothmulti-function bays and the external floppy disk drive port.When Auto is selected,allows the BIOS to choose the configuration for the controller.

Local Bus Both; Disabled; [Both] E n a bles and disables the integra ted local bus IDE ad a pter.IDE ad a pter: Pri m a ry; Secon d a ry.

Table 3-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Page 86: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

75

Keyboard/Mouse Features SubmenuThe Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu is forsetting the parameters of the integrated and external mouse and keyboard. Follow theinstructions for Navigating Through the SetupUtility to make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-6 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Keyboard/Mouse submenu,all of theoptions for each field,the default settings and a description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-6 Keyboard/Mouse Features Submenu

Page 87: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

76

Menu Field Options Default Description

Numlock: Auto; Off;On. [Auto] Sets the NumLock function state when the computercompletes booting.

Hot Plug: Enabled; Disabled. [Enabled] Enables and disables the ability to plug a mouse or keyboard intothe PS/2 port and have it immediately recognized and active.

Internal Pointing Device: Auto Disabled; [Auto Disabled] Sets the device controlling the mouse cursor on the screen. AlwaysAlways Enabled. Enabled makes the ErgoTrac pointing device always enabled

whether there is an external mouse or not. Auto Disabled makesthe ErgoTrac pointing device turn off when an external pointingdevice is connected to the PS/2 port.

Table 3-6 Fields, Options and Defaults of the Keyboard/Mouse Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Page 88: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

77

Multimedia Device Configuration SubmenuThe Multimedia Device Configuration submenuis for setting the features o f the built-in audiofunctions,and enabling joystick function. Followthe instructions for Navigating Through theSetup Utility to make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-7 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Multimedia Device Configurationsubmenu,all of the options for each field, thedefault settings and a description of the field’sfunction and any special information neededto help understand the field’s use.

Figure 3-7 Multimedia Device Configuration Submenu

P O I N T

All I/O addresses in Table 3-7 are inhexadecimal.

Page 89: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

78

Menu Field Options Default Description

Multimedia device: Disabled; Enabled. [Enabled] Enables or disables BIOS support for sound and joystickoperation. If Disabled, none of the following items will appear.

Sound: Disabled; Enabled; Auto. [Enabled] Allows BIOS support for sound to be enabled or disabled. Whenset to Auto, the BIOS or OS will choose the proper sound configu-ration settings and some of the following items will not appear.

Base I/O address: 220-22F; 240-24F; [220-22F] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the user260-26F; 280-28F. to set the base I/O address for the sound device.

FM I/O address: 388-38B;38C-38F; [388-38B] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the user390-393;394-397. to set the base I/O address for the FM device.

MPU-I/O address: 300-301; 310-311; [330-331] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the user320-321;330-331. to set the I/O address for the MPU.

Interrupt: IRQ 5;IRQ 7; IRQ 9; [IRQ 5] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the userIRQ 10; IRQ 11. to set the interrupt for the sound device.

DMA channel: DMA 0; DMA 1; [DMA 1] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the userDMA 3; DMA 5. to set the DMA channel for the sound device.

DMA channel: DMA 0; DMA 1; [DMA 5] When Sound is Enabled,this option is available allowing the userDMA 3; DMA 5. to set the DMA channel for the sound device.

Joystick: Disabled; Enabled. [Enabled] Enables or disables BIOS support for the joystick.

Table 3-7 Fields, Options and Defaults of the Multimedia Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Page 90: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

79

Video Features SubmenuThe Video Features Submenu is for setting thedisplay parameters. Follow the instructions forNavigating Through the Setup Utility to makeany changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-8 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Video Features submenu,all of theoptions for each field, the default settings and a description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-8 Video Features Submenu

Page 91: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

80

Menu Field Options Default Description

Display: Flat-Panel; CRT; [Flat-Panel] Selects where the video signal will be routed.Simultaneous.

Compensation: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Enables or disables compensation which controls spacing on thedisplay. When Enabled displays with less than 800 x 600 pixelresolution will still cover the entire screen.

Table 3-8 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Video Features Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Page 92: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

81

PCI Configuration SubmenuThe PCI Configuration submenu allows theuser to reserve specific interrupts (IRQs) forlegacy ISA devices, and to enable or disablebuilt in PCI device modules. Follow theinstructions for Navigating Through the SetupUtility to make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-9 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the PCI Configuration submenu,all of theoptions for each field,the default settings anda description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-9 PCI Configuration Submenu

Page 93: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

82

IRQ Resource Exclusion: — — Accesses a submenu allowing the user to reserve specific IRQs foruse by legacy ISA devices.

Internal Modem: Disabled; Enabled. [Enabled] Allows the internal modem module to be enabled or disabled.

Table 3-9 Fields, Options and Defaults for the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu

Menu Field Options Default Description

Page 94: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

83

IRQ Reservation Submenuof the PCI Configuration SubmenuThe IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCIConfiguration submenu allows the user to markvarious IRQs as reserved for use by legacy ISAdevices. When an IRQ is reserved,the BIOSdoes not use it for embedded PCI or ISAdevices. Follow the instructions for NavigatingThrough the Setup Utility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Table 3-10 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCIConfiguration submenu,all of the options foreach field,the default settings and a descriptionof the field’s function and any special informa-tion needed to help understand the field’s use.

Figure 3-10 IRQ Reservation Submenu

Page 95: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

84

Table 3-10 Fields, Options and Defaults for the IRQ Reservation Submenu of the of the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced MenuMenu Field Options Default Description

IRQ 3: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 3. If Reserved is selected,the BIOS reserves IRQ 3 for use by legacy ISA devices and does not use it for embeddedPCI or ISA devices.IRQ 3 is removed from the IRQ bitmap in the PCI IRQ routing table.

IRQ 4: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 4.

IRQ 5: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 5.

IRQ 7: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 7.

IRQ 9: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 9.

IRQ 10: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 10.

IRQ 11: Available; Reserved. [Available] Reserves IRQ 11.

C A U T I O N

Only IRQ's 9, 10, & 11 can be reservedwithout conflict.

Page 96: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

85

DMI Event Logging Submenu of the Advanced MenuThe DMI Event Logging Submenu is for settingup the logs DMI event logging. Follow theinstructions for Navigating Through the SetupUtility to make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-11 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the DMI Event Logging submenu,all theoptions for each field,the default settings and a description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-11 DMI Event Logging Submenu

Page 97: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

86

Menu Field Options Default Description

Event log capacity: Display only. [Space Available]

Event log validity: Display only. [Valid]

Clear all DMI event logs: Yes; No. [No] A Yes selection causes the event logs to clear at the next boot.Once the logs are cleared this automatically sets to No until resetto yes by selecting yes here.

Event Logging: Enabled; Disabled. [Enabled] Turns event logging on and off for all DMI events.

System Boot Event: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Turns event logging on and off for DMI system boot events.

Table 3-11 Fields, options and Defaults for the DMI Event Logging Submenu

Page 98: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

87

ACPI Features Submenu of the Advanced MenuThe ACPI Features Submenu is for setting upthe Windows 95 Advanced Configuration andPower Interface parameters. Follow the instruc-tions for Navigating Through the Setup Utilityto make any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-12 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the ACPI Features submenu,all the optionsfor each field, the default settings and a descrip-tion of the field’s function and any specialinformation needed to help understand thefield’s use.

Figure 3-12 ACPI Features Submenu

Page 99: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

88

Menu Field Options Default Description

Enable ACPI: Yes; No. [Yes] Turns on and off the Advanced Configuration andPower Interface.

Table 3-12 Fields, options and Defaults for the ACPI Features Submenu

Exiting from the Advanced MenuWhen you have finished setting the parame terson the Advanced Menu, you can either exitfrom setup utility or move to another menu.If you wish to exit fr om setup utility, press theEsc key to go to the Exit menu. If you wish tomove to another menu, use the cursor keys.

Page 100: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

89

SECURITY MENU – SETTINGTHE SECURITY FEATURESThe Security menu allows you to set up the datasecurity features of your notebook to fit youroperating needs and to view the current datasecurity configuration. Follow the instructionsfor Navigating Through the Setup Utility tomake any changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-13 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Security menu,all of the options foreach field,the default settings and a descriptionof the field's function and any special informa-tion needed to help understand the field's use.The default condition is no passwords requiredand no write protection.

Figure 3-13 Security Menu

Page 101: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

90

P O I N T

If you set a password, write it down andkeep it in a safe place. If you forget thepassword you will have to contact yoursupport representative to regain access toyour secured functions and data.

C A U T I O N

Entering a password incorrectly 3 times in a row will cause the keyboard andmouse to be locked out and the warning[System Disabled] to be displayed.If this happens restart the computer byturning off and on the power with thepower switch and use the correctpassword on reboot.

C A U T I O N

If the Power Management Security isEnabled and the Password on Boot isDisabled you will not be able to resumeoperation from the Suspend or Save-to-Disk modes.

P O I N T

If you make an error when re-enteringthe password a [ W a r n i n g ] will be displayed on the screen. To try againpress the Enter key and then retype thepassword. Press the Esc key to abortthe password setting process.

Page 102: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

91

Menu Field Options Default DescriptionSupervisor Password is: — Clear A display-only field. Set is displayed when the system

supervisor password is set and Clear when it is not.

User Password is: — Clear A display-only field. Set is displayed when the general userpassword is set, and Clear when it is not.

Set Supervisor Password: [Enter] — Sets, changes or cancels the Supervisor Password. The SupervisorPassword may be up to seven characters long and must includeonly lower-case letters or numbers. To cancel a password press the Enter key instead of entering characters in the Enter NewPassword field and in the Re-enter New Password field. Whena Supervisor Password is set it must be used to access the BIOSsetup utility.

Set User Password: [Enter] — (This field can only be accessed if the Supervisor Password is set.)Sets, changes or cancels the User Password. The User Passwordmay be up to seven characters long and must include only lowercase letters or numbers. To cancel a password press the Enter keyinstead of entering characters in the Enter New Password field andin the Re-enter New Password field. When a User Password is setit must be used to access the BIOS setup utility.

Table 3-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu

Page 103: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

92

Menu Field Options Default Description

Diskette access: All; Supervisor Only. [All] Sets the floppy disk access to be secured for access only withSupervisor's password or by all users with a password. The defaultis all users with a password.

Password on boot: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] When set to Enabled,a password (User or Supervisor) is requiredafter the Power On Self Test (POST) before the operating systemwill be read from a disk. When set to Disabled no password isrequired. If no Supervisor Password is set this feature is notavailable and no password is required.

Power Management Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Wh en set to Enabl ed , a password (Us er or Su pervi s or) is requ i redSec u ri ty: to re sume from Su s pend or Save - to - Disk mode . The password

requ i red is the same one requ i red by the Pa s s word on Boot functi on .

Fixed disk boot sector: Normal; Write Protect. [Normal] Sets write protection for the sector of the boot disk which containsthe operating system. When set to Write Protect,the BIOS willprevent any application from writing into the sector of the internalhard drive containing the operating system. When set to Normalthere is no BIOS protection of the operating system.

Table 3-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu

Page 104: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

93

Menu Field Options Default Description

Fixed disk security:

Primary Master: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] When set to Enabled ,a password (User or Supervisor) is requiredto access data on the disk dr ive on the Primary Master interface.

Primary Slave: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] When set to Enabled,a password (User or Supervisor) is requiredto access data on the Primary Slave interface.

Secondary Master: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] When set to Enabled ,a password (User or Supervisor) is requiredto access data on the disk dr ive on the Secondary Master interface.

Table 3-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu

Page 105: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

94

P O I N T

Boot sector protection must be setto [ N o r m a l ] to install or upgrade anoperating system.

Exiting from the Security MenuWhen you have finished setting the parame terson the Security Menu, you can either exit fromsetup utility or move to another menu. If youwish to exit from setup utility, press the Esc keyto go to the Exit Menu. If you wish to move toanother menu,use the cursor keys.

Page 106: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

95

POWER MENU – SETTING POWER MANAGEMENTFEATURE CONTROLSThe Power menu allows you to set and changethe power management parameters. Follow theinstructions for Navigating Through the SetupUtility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Table 3-14 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Power menu,all of the options for eachfield,the default settings and a description ofthe field's function and any special informationneeded to help understand the field's use.

P O I N T

Most power management parameters canalso be set from the Windows 95 desktopwithout entering the setup utility, usingPowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies.Changing the settings with PowerPaneldoes not change what is stored in theCMOS memory. (See pages 40-44.)

Figure 3-14 Power Menu

Page 107: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

96

Menu Field Options Default Description

Power Savings: Customized; Maximum [Customized] Sets the power savings parameters to a factory installedPerformance; Maximum combination of parameters,a custom set of parameters set by youPower Savings, Disabled. or no power saving features.

Hard Disk Timeout: 30 seconds to [Off] Sets the length of time that the hard drive can be inactive before20 minutes;Off. your notebook automatically turns off the power to the hard drive

controller and drive motor. If you choose a factory installedcombination of parameters this field will display the setting. Ifyou choose to customize the parameters you will be able to setthis yourself. The options available vary from Off, which has noinactivity shutoff, to 20 minutes.

Video Timeout: 2 minutes to [Off] Sets the length of time without any user input device activity20 minutes; Off. before the display is turned off. If you choose a factory combination

of parameters,this field will display the setting . If you choose tocustomize the parameters, you will be able to set this yourself.Offhas no inactivity shutoff.

Idle Mode: On;Off. [On] Turns on and off the slow down of the CPU during periods ofinactivity. When this is turned on the CPU clock slows by theamount set in the Advanced submenu when there is no activityfor 16 seconds or more. Normal speed resumes automatically assoon as there is any activity.

Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.

Page 108: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

97

Menu Field Options Default Description

Standby Timeout: 1 minute to [4 Minutes] Sets the length of time without any user input d evice activity16 minutes; Off. before the CPU is set to half speed and the display and the hard

drive are turned off. If you choose a factory combination ofparameters this field will display the setting. If you choose tocustomize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself.

Auto Suspend Timeout: 5 to 60 minutes; Off. [15 Minutes] Sets the length of time without any I/O activity before your notbook goes into Suspend mode. If you choose a factory combinationof parameters this field will display that setting. If you choose tocustomize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself.Offhas no inactivity suspension.

Suspend Mode: Suspend; Save-to-Disk. [Suspend] Sets the form of suspension state. If you choose Suspend, you willsuspend operation with power to system memory, and everythingelse powered down or in a very low power state. If you chooseSave-to-Disk your notebook will save all of system memory andthe operating parameters to the hard drive before turning yournotebook to the pseudo-off condition.

Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.

Page 109: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

98

P O I N T

When resuming from a Save-to-Disksuspension there will be a delay whilethe contents of system memory andoperating parameters are loaded fromthe hard drive.

C A U T I O N

In Save-to-Disk mode there is no indication on the Status Indicator to letyou know you are suspended rather thanshut off from the power switch. You maywant to make a habit of always tryingthe Suspend/Resume button before usingthe power switch.

Page 110: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

99

Menu Field Options Default Description

Auto Save to Disk: Off; After 1 Hour. [Off] When set to After 1 Hour your notebook wi ll autom a ti c a lly save all of system memory and the operating parameters to the hard drive and go to the pseudo-off if you leave your notebook inSuspend mode for an hour.

Resume On On; Off. [Off] Sets whether or not to Resume from a suspension state when aModem Ring: message is received by telephone line. This feature is not available

if the Save-to-Disk mode is enabled. This feature applies to internal,external and PC Card modems.

Resume On Time: On;Off. [Off] Sets whether or not to resume from a suspension state at adesignated time. This feature is available from either the Suspendmode or the Save-to-Disk mode.

Resume Time: – – Sets the designated time, on a 24-hour clock, when the notebookis to automatically resume operation from the Suspend state.The format of the clock setting is hours:minutes:seconds.Eachsegment of the time is set separately, either by incrementing or bytyping in the numbers. You move between the segments with theTab key or the Shift+Tab keys. This only applies when Resume onTime is set to On.

Advanced Features: – – When selected, opens the Advanced Features submenu whichallows setting additional power saving parameters.

Table 3-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.

Page 111: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

100

Customized: Off Off On 4 Minutes 15 Minutes

Maximum 30 Seconds 2 Minutes On 1 Minute 5 MinutesPower Savings:

Maximum Off Off Off Off 15 MinutesPerformance:

Disabled: Off Off Off Off Off

Sample Customized Profile: 2 Minutes 1 Minute On 1 Minute 5 Minutes(To get even betterbattery life keep thedisplay and volumesettings as low aspossible and use thesample customized profile.)

Factory Installed Values for Power Saving Profiles

Hard Disk Timeout Video Timeout Idle Mode Standby Timeout Auto Suspend Timeout

Page 112: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

101

Advanced FeaturesSubmenu of the Power MenuThe Advanced Features submenu is for settingsome non-time related power saving parame-ters. Follow the instructions for NavigatingThrough the Setup Utility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Table 3-15 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Video Features submenu,all of theoptions for each field,the default settings and a description of the field's function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field's use.

Exiting from the Power MenuWhen you have finished setting the parameterson the Power menu, you can either exit from theSetup utility or move to another menu. If youwish to exit from Setup utility press the Esc keyto go to the Exit menu. If you wish to move toanother menu,use the cursor keys.

Figure 3-15 Advanced Features Submenu

Page 113: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

102

Menu Field Options Default Description

SUS/RES Switch: Enabled; Disabled. [Enabled] Sets the function of the Suspend/Resume button when your notebook is in an active state. The resume function can notbe disabled as it works regardless of any other settings.

Lid Closure Suspend: On; Off. [On] Enables and disables having closure of the Display panel put yournotebook in Suspend mode.

Lid Open Resume: On; Off. [On] Enables and disables having opening the Display panel acting asan automatic resume.

APM CPU Idle Mode: Low Power; Standard. [Low Power] Sets the CPU speed during Idle mode.

LCD Backlight Mode: Low Power; Standard. [Standard] Sets the CPU speed during Video timeout and Lid ClosureSuspend activation.

Serial Mouse Activity: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Enables and disables having activity on the serial port cause thesystem to reactivate from inactivity timeouts.

Table 3-15 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Features Submenu of the Power Menu

Page 114: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

103

BOOT MENU – SELECTING THEOPERATING SYSTEM SOURCEThe Boot Menu is used to select the orderin which the BIOS searches sources for theoperating system.

Table 3-16 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Boot menu,all of the options for eachfield, the default settings and a description ofthe field's function and any special informationneeded to help understand the field's use

Figure 3-16 Boot Menu

Page 115: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

104

Menu Field Options Default Description

QuickBoot Mode: Enabled; Disabled. [Enabled] Turns on and off booting with a truncated set of Power On SelfTest.(Fewer tests mean faster turn on.)

Boot-time Diagnostic Screen: Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Turns on and off display of test results instead of Fujitsu logoscreen during Power On Self Test.

Preboot Execution Enabled; Disabled. [Disabled] Turns on and off the preboot execution environment feature.Environment:

Boot Device Priority: Selects the Boot Device — This menu allows setting up the source for the operating system.Priority submenu.

Table 3-16 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Menu

Page 116: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

105

The Boot Device Priority Submenu of the Boot MenuThe Boot Device Priority Submenu is for set-ting the order of checking of sources for theoperating system. Follow the instructions forNavigating Through the Setup Utility to makeany changes. (See page 57.)

Table 3-17 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Boot Device Priority submenu,all theoptions for each field,the default settings anda description of the field’s function and anyspecial information needed to help understandthe field’s use.

Figure 3-17 Boot Device Priority Submenu

Page 117: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

106

Menu Field Options Default Description

1. Diskette Drive: –— –— The boot selections determine the order in which the BIOSsearches for the operating system during a startup sequence. Tochange the order highlight one source by using the up Õ, downÔ cursor keys and then press the + or - key to change the ordernumber for that source. Be sure to save your changed order whenyou exit the BIOS se tup utility.

2. Hard Drive: –— –—

3. ATAPI CD-ROM Drive: –— –—

Table 3-17 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Device Priority Submenu

Exiting from Boot MenuWhen you have finished setting the boot para-meters with the Boot menu, you can either exitfrom the setup utility or move to another menu.If you wish to exit from the setup utility pressthe Esc key to go to the Exit menu. If you wishto move to another menu,use the cursor keys.

Page 118: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

107

INFO MENUThe Info menu is a display only menu thatprovides the configuration information foryour notebook.

Table 3-18 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Info menu,all the options for each field,the default settings and a description of thefield’s function and any special informationneeded to help understand the field’s use.

Figure 3-18 Info Menu

P O I N T

The asset number is an optional user-entered field. A asset number can be entered through the use of athird party software, such as LANdeskClient Manager.

Page 119: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

108

Menu Field Options Default

BIOS Version: — 1.08

BIOS Date: — 04/08/1998

BIOS Area: — E800h – FFFFh

CPU Type: — Pentium MMX™

CPU Speed: — 200 MHz

L1 Cache: — 32 KB

L2 Cache: — 512 KB

Total Memory: — 32 MB

On Board: — 32 MB SDRAM

DIMM: — Not Installed

Asset Number — None

Table 3-18 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Info Menu

Page 120: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

109

EXIT MENU – LEAVING THE SETUP UTILITYThe Exit Menu is used to leave the setuputility. Follow the instructions for NavigatingThrough the Setup Utility to make any changes.(See page 57.)

Table 3-19 shows the names of the menu fieldsfor the Exit menu,all of the options for eachfield,the default settings and a description ofthe field's function and any special informationneeded to help understand the field's use.

Figure 3-19 Exit Menu

Page 121: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

110

Menu Field Options Default Description

Exit Saving Ch a n ge s : — — Exit Saving Ch a n ges and Exit wi ll store all the en tries on everym enu of the setup uti l i ty to the BIOS mem ory and then exit thes etup uti l i ty. A con firm a ti on message Save Configuration Changes and Exit Now? [Yes] [No] wi ll be displayed .

Exit Discarding Changes: — — Selecting Exit Discarding Changes and Exit will exit the setup utility with out w riting to the BIOS memory. When the BIOS recognizes this selection it will load the operating system and beginoperation. A message Warning Configuration Changes have not been saved. Save before exiting? [Yes] [No] will be displayed.

Load Setup Defaults: — — Selecting Load Setup Defaults will load the factory presetdefault values for all menu fields, then display the messageSetup Confirmation Load Default configuration now? [Yes] [No] When confirmed the setup utility will return to the Exit Menu. To return to another menu follow the directions in the Navigating Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 57.)

Table 3-19 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.

Page 122: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

111

Menu Field Options Default Description

Discard Changes: — — Selecting Discard Changes will load the values in BIOSmemory for all menu fields. Setup Confirmation LoadPrevious values now? [Yes] [No] When confirmedthe setup utility will return to the Exit menu. To return toanother menu, follow the directions in the Navigating

Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 57.)

Save Changes: — — Selecting Save Changes will cause the new settings in all menus to be written to the BIOS memory. Setup Confirmation Save Changes now? [Yes] [No] When confirmedthe setup utility will return to the Exit menu. To return to anothermenu, follow the directions in the Navigating Through the Setup Utility section. (See page 57.)

Table 3-19 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.

Page 123: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n T h r e e

112

SETTING UP YOUR SAVE-TO-DISK FILE ALLOCATIONYour notebook comes with an all oc a ti on of s p aceon the internal hard drive adequ a te to opera te theSave - to - Disk functi on for the amount of m em oryi n s t a ll ed at the factory. If you add a mem oryu pgrade module or do not use the Save - to - Di s kf u n cti on and wish to free up the disk space , yo uwi ll need to ch a n ge your all oc a ti on . The uti l i ty toch a n ge the all oc a ti ons is PHDISK.EXE and isactiva ted from the MS-DOS prom pt .

PHDISK allows you to perform five differentfunctions related to the Save-to-Disk space onyour internal hard drive. They are:

1. Allocate a space for the Save-to-Disk function.

2. Remove all space allocation for the Save-to-Disk function.

3. Find out details about the hard drive and thecurrent Save-to-Disk space allocation.

4. Re-allocate space and mark bad blocks in thespace allocated to the Save-to-Disk functionwhen a disk error has occurred.

5.Find out how much space is needed toperform the Save-to-Disk function withthe current memory configuration and howmuch unused space is available on theinternal hard drive.

To find out how much space is needed toperform the Save-to-Disk function with thecurrent memory configuration and howmuch unused space is available on theinternal hard drive, do the following:

1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.

2. At the DOS prompt typeCD C:\Fujitsu

3. Type P H D I S K

4. Press the Enter key.

The screen will display the amount disk spa ceneeded to perform the Save-to-Disk functionwith the current memory configuration andhow much unused space is available on theinternal hard drive.

To find out details about the hard drive andthe current Save-to-Disk space allocation, dothe following:

1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.

2. At the DOS prompt typeCD C:\Fujitsu

3. Type PHDISK /INFO

4. Press the Enter key.

5. The screen will display the size of the spacecurrently allocated to the Save-to-Disk func-

Page 124: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C o n f i g u r i n g Y o u r L i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

113

tion and other parameters about the spaceand the hard drive.

To remove all space allocation for the Save-to-Disk function, do the following:

1.Go to the Start Menu and select MS-DOSPrompt.

2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu

3. Type PHDISK /DELETE /FILE.

4. Press the Enter key.

The utility will remove the space allocation forthe Save-to-Disk function and free that spacefor other use.

To create a space allocation for the Save-to-Disk function, do the following:

1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.

2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu

3. At the DOS prompt typePHDISK /CREATE /FILE

4. Press the Enter key.

5. The utility will create a Save-to-Disk filecalled SAVE2DSK.BIN in the root directory.It will be of the minimum size needed tosupport the Save-to-Disk function with thecurrent memory configuration.

If you have had a read or w rite error when youtried to perform a Save-to-Disk operation youcan re-allocate space to compensate for badblocks on your drive. To do this:

1.Go to the MS-DOS prompt.

2. Type C D : \ F u j i t s u

3. Type PHDISK /REFORMAT /FILE

4. Press the Enter key.

5. The utility will re-create the Save-to-Disk filecalled SAVE2DSK.BIN with the same usablesize and any bad blocks marked.

C A U T I O N

Never use PARTITION in place of FILEwith the PHDISK Utility or you will reformat your internal hard drive and alldata, applications and operating systemwill be destroyed.

Page 125: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sS e c t i o n F o u r

Multi-function Bay Devices . . . . . . . . . 117

PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Parallel Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Serial Port Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Stereo Line In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Mouse or Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Memory Upgrade Module . . . . . . . . . 129

LANdock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Page 126: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

116

SECTION FOURUSER INSTALLABLE FEATURESYour LifeBook 700 Series has a number of userinstallable features:

■ PC Card slots in the left side panel of yournotebook allow you to install PC Cards,IC memory cards (SRAM card) or ZoomedVideo cards (Slot 1 only).

■ The dual warm-swappable Multi-functionbays in the front of your notebook allow youto install the CD-ROM drive,the floppy diskdrive,an optional second hard drive, anoptional Zip drive, or an optional secondLithium ion battery.

■ A compartment on the bottom of your notebook allows you to install a memoryupgrade module.

■ A microphone jack on the right side ofyour notebook allows you to connecta mono microphone.

■ A stereo line in jack on the right side of yournotebook allows you to connect a soundsource such as a cassette recorder.

■ A headphone jack on the right side of yournotebook allows you to connect headphonesor powered speakers.

■ A PS/2 port on the right side of your note-book allows you to connect an externalmouse, keyboard or numeric keypad.

■ An external floppy disk drive port on theright side of your notebook allows you toattach an external floppy disk drive whenthe Multi-function bays are being used forother purposes.

■ A USB port in the right side of your note-book allows you to connect a Universal SerialBus device.

■ An RJ-11 jack in the back of your notebookallows you to connect a telephone line to theinternal modem.

■ A docking port on the back of your notebookallows the connection of a docking device.

■ A serial port in the back of your notebookallows you to connect serial devices, suchas RS-232C serial printers or scanners.

■ A parallel port in the back of your notebookallows you to connect a parallel printer,photo or text scanner, etc.

■ An external monitor port in the back ofyour notebook allows you to connect anexternal monitor.

This section describes how to install and r emoveequipment for each of the expansion features.

Page 127: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

117

MULTI-FUNCTION BAY DEVICESThe bays in the front panel of your notebookaccommodate the CD-ROM drive, the floppydisk drive,the Lithium ion batteries (a secondbattery is optional) or the optional second hard drive.

C A U T I O N

Do not use your notebook with either ofthe Multi-function Bays empty. It maydamage your notebook.

Figure 4-1 Multi-function Bay Modules

Floppy Disk Drive

Lithium ion Battery

Second Hard Drive

CD-ROM Drive

Floppy Disk Drive

Lithiun ion Battery

Device Adapter for Bay 2

Zip Drive

Bay 1 Modules Bay 2 Modules The Multi-function bays support a varietyof configurations.

Multi-function Bay 1 supports:

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive(included with your notebook).

■ Lithium ion battery(included with your notebook).

■ Optional Zip drive.

Multi-function Bay 2 supports:

■ 20-speed maximum CD-ROM drive(included with your notebook).

■ Optional second hard drive.

■ Optional Zip drive installed (in deviceadapter for Multi-function Bay 2).

■ 3.5" floppy disk drive installed in DeviceAdapter for Multi-function Bay 2.(Adapter included with your notebook.)

■ Lithium ion battery installed in DeviceAdapter for Multi-function Bay 2.(Adapter included with your notebook.)

Zip Drive

Page 128: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

Removing a Device in eitherMulti-function Bay 1 or 2.1. Close any open files on the removable device

that you plan to eject from the computer, if adevice is currently installed.

2. Right-click the Tioman taskbar icon todisplay the menu.

3. Select either the Remove Device or SwapDevice menu item.

S e c t i o n F o u r

118

This icon provides a visual cue for the currentlyinserted device. You will immediately noticewhether a diskette drive,CD-ROM drive, harddrive, or even no device is inserted in the bay.Hover over the icon with the cursor to displaythe tooltip balloon, containing information onthe inserted device. Right-click on the icon todisplay the Tioman menu. This menu offersadditional functionality for swapping devices,getting help, as well as information on theTioman software.

C A U T I O N

Be careful aligning and seating modulesin the bay. If the fit is incorrect you maydamage the bay or the module. If themodule does not move easily, remove it, and check for dirt or foreign objects. It will require a firm push to latch themodule in place.

The Lithium ion battery included with yournotebook can power your notebook from eitherbay. Your notebook also supports a dual batteryconfiguration with a Lithium ion battery inboth bays at the same time. (The optional sec-ond battery must be purchased separately.) Itdoes not support multiple floppy disk drives,but has three different places to install one.

Warm-swappable Devices inMulti-function Bay 1 and 2Devices designed for use in Multi-functionBays 1 and 2 o f your LifeBook 700 Series note-book computer are warm-swappable. Devicesin either Multi-function Bay can be installedor removed while the system is in Suspendmode. In order to facilitate the warm-swapprocess, your notebook contains Tiomanwarm-swap software from Agaté. The Tiomansoftware loads at system startup and displaysan icon in the Status area at the right of theWindows 95 Taskbar.

Figure 4-2 Removing and Installing a Device in Multi-function Bay 1

Multi-function Bay 1 Release Button

Page 129: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

119

4. When the notebook goes into the Suspendmode you can safely remove the device fromthe Multifunction Bay.

5. Slide the release latch at the left rear corner ofthe Multi-function Bay toward the outer edgeof your notebook.

6. Slide the device forward until the unit is clearof the compartment. This will require someforce. Use the finger ridge on the bottom ofthe device.

Multi-function Bay 2Release Button

Figure 4-3 Removing and Installing a Device in Multi-function Bay 2

4.Orient the item to be installed with the fingerridge away from the body of your notebookand the connector toward the body ofyour notebook.

C A U T I O N

The system must be in Suspend modebefore attempting to insert a device intoeither of the Multi-function Bays. Failureto do so can cause damage to yournotebook or the device.

Installing a Device in Multi-function Bay 21. If you are swapping a device your computer

should already be suspended. If it is not, gothrough steps 1 to 4 of the previous section(Removing a Device in Multi-functionBay 1 or 2) to place your notebook inSuspend mode.

5. With the module connector toward the backof your notebook align the grooves on theside of the device with the tracks in the sideof the bay. (Figure 4-3.)

6. Slide the module toward the back of yournotebook until it clicks into place.

7. Press the Suspend/Resume Button to reacti-vate the notebook from the Suspend mode.

8. The Tioman software will automaticallydetect the new device and place it online.

Page 130: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

120

CD-ROM DriveYour CD-ROM drive is durable but you musttreat it with care.Please pay attention to the following points:

■ The drive rotates the compact disk at veryhigh speed. Do not carry it around or subjectit to shock or vibration with the power on.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive or CDswhere they will be exposed to extreme temperatures.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive or CDswhere it is damp or dust y.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields.

C A U T I O N

The module is not locked into the DeviceAdapter for Multi-function Bay 2. Becareful to hold on to both parts or youcan easily drop and damage a moduleor the adapter.

To Install a Module in the Device Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2.1. Align the device adapter for Multi-function

Bay 2 with the solid side up and the roundededges toward you.

2. Align your Multi-function Bay 1 device withthe finger ridge up and the connector awayfrom you.

3. Set the device adapter for Multi-functionBay 2 on top of the Multi-function Bay 1device and adjust until the finger ridge showsthrough the hole in the device adapter forMulti-function Bay 2,and the alignment pinson the Multi-function Bay 1 device fit in thesmall round holes of the device adapter forMulti-function Bay 2.

4. Hold the two parts together while installingin Multi-function Bay 2 according to the preceding directions.

To remove a module from the device adapterfor Multi-function Bay 2 simply pull themgently apart.

Figure 4-4 Installing a Module in the Device Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2

■ Avoid storing the drive where it willbe subjected to shock or vibration.

■ Do not disassemble or dismantle the CD-ROM drive.

For guidance on loading a CD in your CD-ROMdrive and caring for CD-ROMs see Section Two.(pages 36-37.)

Page 131: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

121

Figure 4-6 Optional Second Hard Drive

C A U T I O N

The CD-ROM drive must be installedor removed from either Multi-functionBay 1 or 2 with the notebook either inthe Suspend mode or else the powermust be off. Failure to do so can causedamage to your notebook or the device.

Optional Second Hard DriveThe optional second hard drive is durable butyou must treat it with care.Please pay attentionto the following points:

■ The drive rotates the disk at very high speed.Do not carry it around or subject it to shockor vibration with the power on.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive where it willbe exposed to extreme temperatures.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive where it isdamp or dusty.

■ Avoid using or storing the drive near magnetsor devices that generate strong magnetic fields.

Figure 4-5 CD-ROM Drive

■ Do not disassemble or dismantle the harddisk drive.

After the optional second hard drive is installedit will take a short time for your notebook torecognize it.

You will need to format your optional secondhard drive when you install it for the very firsttime. Check your operating system documenta-tion for information on initializing a hard drive.Be careful to only format your optional secondhard drive once or you will e rase everything youhave stored on it.

C A U T I O N

If you are installing or removing theoptional second hard drive from eitherMulti-function Bay 1 or 2 the notebookmust be either in Suspend mode or elsethe power must be off. Failure to do socan cause damage to your notebook orthe device.

■ Avoid storing the drive where it will be sub-jected to shock or vibration.

Page 132: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

122

C A U T I O N

Data may be lost and/or system errorsintroduced if the warm-swap is not performed quickly or a power adapter isnot installed.

C A U T I O N

The bridge battery can not support anoperating notebook. The notebook mustbe in Suspend mode.

Figure 4-7 Lithium ion Battery

Lithium ion BatteryYour Lithium ion battery is durable and longlasting but should not be exposed to extremetemperatures,high voltages, chemicals orother hazards.

C A U T I O N

If the Lithium ion battery connector isnot fully seated, you may not be able to use your notebook or charge your battery. charged battery. The NiCd bridge battery is

built-in your notebook and is constantly beingcharged. The bridge battery capacity is notlarge, about 3 minutes,and can vary with thecondition of your notebook. (See page 26.)

Batteries should be removed and stored sepa-rately in a cool dry place if your notebook isnot going to be used for an extended periodof time.

Installing the BatteryThe battery may be installed singly in eitherbay, using the device adapter for Multi-functionBay 2. With the purchase of an additional bat-tery, batteries may be installed in a dual config-uration, one in each bay. A bridge battery allowsa charged Lithium ion battery to be exchangedfor a discharged one by “warm-swapping”. Towarm-swap, have a charged battery ready toinstall,put your notebook in Suspend mode,remove the low battery and quickly insert the

Under federal,state or local law it may be ille-gal to dispose of batteries by putting them inthe trash.Please take care of our environmentand dispose of batteries properly. Check withyour local government authority for detailsregarding recycling or disposing of your oldbattery, or contact your support representativeat 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487).

Page 133: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

123

Optional Zip DriveAn optional Zip drive using removable disks,with a capacity of 100MB, can be installed ineither bay.

The first time you use a Zip drive on yourLifeBook 700 Series notebook, you will need toinstall the Zip Tools software onto your system.

Installing the Zip Tools software.1. Insert the Zip drive in either Multi-function

bay as described on page 119.

2. Insert the Zip Tools disk into the Zip dr ive.

3. Use the Run command from the Windows 95Start menu to run d:\install from the Zipdrive. Note that your system may assigna drive designator other than d: to theZip drive.

4. Select your language preference and followthe instructions that appear on the screen.

Figure 4-8 Floppy Disk Drive

Floppy Disk DriveThe floppy disk drive can be installed in eitherMulti-function Bay. In Bay 1 install directly, or inBay 2 install in the device adapter first. In addi-tion,an optional external floppy disk drive maybe purchased to use when both Multi-functionbays are needed for other uses. (For informationon the care and use o f floppy disk drives see Floppy Disk Drive in Section Two on pages 34-36.To install an external floppy disk drive see ExternalInstallation of a Floppy Disk Drive on page 128.)

C A U T I O N

If you are installing or removing the floppy disk drive from Multi-function Bay 1, the power must be off . If youare installing or removing from Multi-function Bay 2, the notebook must beeither in Suspend mode or else thepower must be off.

P O I N T

You may receive the following error whileinstalling the Zip Tools software: “NoIomega drives found.” Select OK. Theinstallation process will continue correctly.

Page 134: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

124

Caring for PC Cards PC Cards are durable; however, you must treatthem with care. The documentation suppliedwith your PC Card will provide specific infor-mation but you should pay attention to the following points:

■ To keep out dust and dirt,store PC Cards in their protective sleeves when they are notinstalled in your notebook.

■ Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlightor excessive heat.

■ Keep the cards dr y.

■ Do not flex or bend the cards,and do notplace heavy objects on top of them.

■ Do not force cards into the slot.

■ Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting themto excessive vibration.

Figure 4-9 Installing and Removing a PC Card

Eject Button Slot 1

Eject Button Slot 2

PC Card Lock

PC CARDSPC Cards perform a wide variety of functions,and are ideal for mobile computers.

Some available PC Cards:■ Fax/data modem cards (Type II).

■ Local area network (LAN) cards (Type II).

■ Wireless LAN cards (Type II).

■ 1MB and 2MB static RAM (SRAM) cards(Type I).

■ IDE solid-state disk cards ( Type II).

■ SCSI cards (Type II).

■ Zoomed Video cards (Type II, Slot 1 only).

■ ATA cards (Type III).

■ Other PC Cards that conform to PCMCIA2.1 or CardBus standards.

For further information, refer to the instruc-tions supplied with your PC Card.

Page 135: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

125

C A U T I O N

Do not insert a PC Card into a slot if thereis water or any other substance on thecard; you may permanently damage thecard, your notebook, or both.

C A U T I O N

Installing or removing a card while yournotebook is in the process of goingthrough the power on or power offsequence may damage the card and/oryour notebook.

Installing a PC Card1. See your PC Card manual for instructions on

installation of that specific card.

2. Make sure that there is not already a PC Cardin the slot. If there is, eject it,as described inRemoving PC Cards.

3. Insert the PC Card in the card slot, with theproduct name label facing up. (Figure 4-9.)

Installing or Removing PC Cards in Your NotebookPC cards are install ed in the PC Ca rd slot in thel eft side panel of your noteboo k . Some PC Ca rd swi ll not work wh en all po s s i ble devi ces areen a bl ed . If a PC Ca rd is not recogn i zed , you wi lln eed to open the Con trol panel , the Sys tem fo l d-er, and then the Devi ce Ma n a ger, and ch oose adevi ce to disable so that the re s o u rces can beu s ed by the PC Ca rd .

C A U T I O N

Some PC Cards can only be installed orremoved with the power in Suspendmode, some only with power Off. Please check the card documentation for correct usage.

C A U T I O N

Windows 95 has a shutdown procedurefor PC Cards that must be followedbefore beginning to remove a card.

Removing PC Cards1.Shutdown operation of the card.

2. Click on the PC Card indicator on theWindows taskbar.

3. Select the card to be removed and clickon the Stop button.

4. When the PC Card is ful ly inserted,the ejectbutton will pop out.

5.Flip this button toward the front of yournotebook to fold it out of the way.

6. When the card is installed,lock it in placeby sliding the Lock button toward the frontof your notebook. (Figure 4-9.)

Page 136: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

126

C A U T I O N

If the PC Card has an external connectorand cable, do not pull on this cable whenremoving the card.

STEREO LINE IN DEVICEMake sure that your stereo line in audio device,a cassette recorder, for example,is equippedwith an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. Makesure the plug is aligned and push it into the jackuntil fully seated. (See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

HEADPHONESMake sure that your stereo headphones areequipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. Make sure the plug is aligned and push it into the jack until fully seated.(See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

SERIAL PORT DEVICESTo connect an RS-232C device to the serialport, be sure that the connector is the right sizeand aligned,then push in until it is fully seated.When it is seated tighten the hold-down screws,one on each end of the connector.(See Figure 1-9 on page 9.)

USB DEVICESWhen installing a device on the USB Port, besure that the connector is the right size,aligned,and fully seated. (See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

P O I N T

Plugging in headphones disables thebuilt-in stereo speakers.

4. Verify that the You can safely removeyour card message appears.

5. If the device cannot be removedmessage appears, save all files, close allapplications, and exit Windows 95 then shut-off the power with the power switch.(See Power Off on pages 24-25.)

C A U T I O N

Due to ongoing changes in USB technologyand standards not all USB devices and/ordrivers are guaranteed to work.

PARALLEL PORT DEVICESTo connect a parallel interface device to the par-allel port, be sure that the connector is the rightsize and aligned,then push in until it is fullyseated. When it is seated tighten the hold-downscrews, one on each end of the connector.(See Figure 1-9 on page 9.)

MICROPHONEMake sure that your mono microphone isequipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) monomini-plug. Make sure the plug is alignedand push it into the jack until fully seated.(See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

Page 137: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

127

C A U T I O N

The internal modem is not intended foruse with Digital PBX systems. Do notconnect the internal modem to a digitalPBX as it may cause serious damage tothe internal modem or your entire note-book. Consult your PBX manufacturer’sdocumentation for details. Some hotelshave Digital PBX systems. Be sure to findout BEFORE you connect your modem.

TELEPHONE LINESTo attach a telephone line to the internalmodem open the rear panel connector cover orwith the cover closed slide the panel in the con-nector cover slightly opened to reveal the RJ-11jack.Plug one end of the telephone cable intothe telephone line outlet.Orient the telephonecable with the release latch on the connectorup. Push it into the jack until it clicks and latches. (See Figure 1-9 on page 9.)

MOUSE, KEYBOARD OR KEYPADMake sure the connector on your device is the correct PS/2 type. Align the arrow on theconnector to point to the bottom of your note-book and push it in until the connector seats.A mouse, keyboard or keypad may be installedand automatically recognized by your notebookwithout restarting or changing setups.(See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

EXTERNAL MONITORYou may install an external monitor on theexternal monitor port on the rear panel o f yournotebook. Make sure that the wide side o f theconnector is up and attach it to the port bypushing in until it is seated,then tighten thehold-down screw on each end of the connector.(See Figure 1-9 on page 9.)

C A U T I O N

Pressing F10 while holding down the Fnkey allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Eachtime you press the combination of keysyou will step to the next choice. Thechoices, in order, are: built-in display panelonly, external monitor only, or both built-indisplay panel and external monitor.

THEFT PREVENTION LOCKA physical security system lock can be installedon the right side of your notebook. (See Figure1-8 on page 8 for the location of the lock slot.)Simply insert the key end of your securitysystem in the slot, rotate 90 degrees and lock.(See Figure 1-8 on page 8.)

Page 138: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

128

5. Insert the connector of the external floppydisk drive firmly into the port on your note-book until it clicks.

To disconnect an external floppy disk drive:1. Close all files and exit all applications

2. Turn off power to your notebook, close thedisplay and remove the AC adapter.(See pages 24-25 for more information.)

3. Squeeze together firmly on the release but-tons on either side of the external floppy diskdrive connector next to the body of yournotebook. (Figure 4-10.)

4. Pull the connector free.

5. Close the floppy disk drive port cover onyour notebook by tilting up and pressinguntil it latches.

Figure 4-10 External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive.

External Floppy DiskDrive Port

External Floppy DiskDrive Connector Cover

Connector Release Button

ConnectorRelease Button

External Floppy Disk Drive

EXTERNAL INSTALLATION OF A FLOPPY DISK DRIVETo install a floppy disk drive externally,you must purchase an optional external floppy disk drive.

To connect a floppy disk drive externally:1. Close all files and exit all applications.

2. Turn off power to your notebook, close the display and remove the AC adapter.(See pages 24-25 for more information.)

3. Open the external floppy disk drive portcover on the right side panel of your note-book, (see Figure 4-10), by gently pulling on the left side of the cover and thentilting it down.

4. Align the connector of the external floppydisk drive with the connector towards thebody of your notebook with the wide side ofthe connector up. (Figure 4-10)

Page 139: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

129

Figure 4-11 Opening the Memory Upgrade Compartment

Figure 4-12 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module

C A U T I O N

Never remove screws except the onesspecifically shown in the directions forinstalling and removing the memoryupgrade module.

To Install a Memory Upgrade Module:1. Turn off power to your notebook using

the power switch, (see Power Off on pages24-25), and remove any power adapter(AC or auto/airline).

2. Make sure that all the connector coversare closed.

3. Turn the notebook bottom side up, with thefront panel toward you.

4. Remove the screws at the front of the memory upgrade module compartment.(See Figure 4-11.)

5. Remove the cover by tilting the front edgeup and then pulling forward until the tabson the cover are free. (See Figure 4-11.)

6. Remove the memory upgrade module fromthe static guarded sleeve.

MEMORY UPGRADE MODULEYour notebook has 32MB of installed SDRAM.To increase your memory capacity you mayinstall a memory upgrade module in the mem-ory upgrade compartment in the bottom ofyour notebook. The memory upgrade moduleis a Small Outline dual-in-line memory module(SODIMM). You may add modules of differentcapacity. SDRAM modules are recommendedbut EDO modules will work. Installing an EDOmodule will cause your system to operate at aslower rate.

Page 140: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

130

C A U T I O N

The memory upgrade module can beseverely damaged by electro-static dis-charge (ESD). Be sure you are properlygrounded when handling and installingthe module.

9. Press the memory upgrade module downinto the compartment until it lodges underthe retaining clip. You will hear a click whenit is properly in place.

10. Replace the cover by hooking the tabs under the rear edge of the compartmentopening and tilting down until flush withthe bottom of your notebook.

11. Replace the screws.

The memory upgrade module is not somethingyou routinely remove from your notebook.Once it is installed, you can leave it in placeunless you want to increase systemmemory capacity.

C A U T I O N

Before you install or remove the memoryupgrade module, save changes and closeall files and turn power off to your note-book. (See Power Off on pages 24-25.)

7. Align the memory upgrade module withthe part side up. Align the connector edgeof the memory upgrade module with theconnector slot in the compartment. Theconnector will be p ointing toward the rearof the notebook. (Figure 4-12.)

8. Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45° angle. (Figure 4-12.) Press the connec-tor edge of the module firmly down andinto the connector.

To Remove a Memory Upgrade Module:1. Perform steps 1 through 5 of To Install a

Memory Upgrade Module.

2. Pull the clips sideways away from each sideof the memory upgrade module at the sametime. (Figure 4-12.)

3. While holding the clips out, remove themodule from the slot by lifting it up andpulling towards the front of your notebook.(Figure 4-12.)

4. Store the memory upgrade module in astatic guarded sleeve.

5. Replace the cover by following the instructionsin steps 10 and 11 of the instructions for ToInstall a Memory Upgrade Module, or installa new memory upgrade module and thenreplace the cover by following the instructionsin steps 7 through 11 of the instructions To Install a Memory Upgrade Module.

Page 141: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

131

3. The System Memory and the ExtendedMemory capacity, as detected by your note-book during the Power On Self Test (POST),are displayed at the bottom of the Mainmenu screen.

Example:A system with 32MB of memorywill display 640K System Memory, 31MBExtended Memory.

C A U T I O N

The memory upgrade module can be severely damaged by electro-staticdischarge (ESD). Be sure you are properlygrounded when handling and removingthe module.

When you have installed additional memory,the display should change. For example for:

Total RAM System ExtendedInstalled Memory Memory32 MB 640 K 31.7 MB48 MB 640 K 48.5 MB64 MB 640 K 64 MB96 MB 640 K 97 MB

Figure 4-13 LANdock Front View

LANdock unit

LevelingAlignment Foot

Alignment Notches

Docking ConnectorTelephone Connector

Undock Request Button

Docked LED

Ready to Undock LED

Docking Release Lever

Docking Alignment Pins

Checking the Computer Recognition of New Memory CapacityWhen you have changed system memory capac-ity by adding or removing a memory upgrademodule, be sure to check that your notebookhas recognized all of the memory. You cancheck memory capacity by looking at the Mainmenu of the setup utility:

1. Turn on power using the power switch.

2.Enter the setup utility by pressing the F2 keyas soon as the Fujitsu logo appears on thescreen. (See pages 55-56.)

Page 142: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

132

LANDOCKTo Install your Notebook in a LANdock:1. Put your notebook in Suspend mode or

turn off the power.

2. To use a docking device with your note-book they both must be on a flat surface.

3. Remove all connections from the rear panel of your notebook. (See Figure 1-9 on page 9.)

4. Make sure that the adjustment feet are flatagainst the bottom of the notebook and thecovers of the connectors, both rear paneland right side panel, are closed.

5. Make sure that the slide cover in the rearpanel is completely open.

6. Set your notebook on the Docking StationLeveler, making sure that the Alignmentpins on the leveler (Figures 4-13 and 4-16.)fit into the Docking Alignment receptaclesin the bottom of your notebook (Figure 1-10 on page 10.)

If the total memory displayed is not what youbelieve it should be, check that your memoryupgrade module is properly installed. If it isproperly installed and the capacity is not cor-rectly recognized,see the TroubleshootingSection starting on page 138.

Undock Request Button

PCCard Slot

External Monitor Port

External FloppyDisk Drive Port

HeadphoneJack

MIDI/Joystick PortDual USB Ports

RJ-11 JackRJ-45 Jack

Ready to Undock LED

Docked LED

DC Power Jack

Serial Port

PS/2 Mouse Port

Parallel PortPS/2 Keyboard Port

Figure 4-14 LANdock Rear View

C A U T I O N

Follow the instructions that come withyour LANdock or Port Replicator. Theinstructions and illustrations in this manual are only to serve as a guideline.The LANdock manual that is includedwith the LANdock unit supersedes these instructions.

Page 143: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

133

7. Arrange the notebook/leveler combinationto align the docking connector on thedocking device body with the Docking porton your notebook and the notches on theleveler with the notches on the dockingdevice body.

8. Push together firmly.

9. Lock in place by pulling the DockingRelease lever forward.

10. Verify that docking is complete by checkingthat the LifeBook Docked LED is il luminated.(See Figures 4-13 and 4-16.)

11. Return your notebook to operation using theSuspend/Resume button or power switch,asappropriate. (When setting up for the firsttime you must use the power switch.)

Connecting Devices to the LANdock or Port ReplicatorConnect devices to your LANdock or PortReplicator in exactly the same way you wouldyour notebook.Figure 4-14 shows the location ofLANdock ports and jacks.Figure 4-17 shows thelocation of the Port Replicator ports and jacks.Remember that on the LANdock and the PortReplicator there are separate ports for mouse and keyboard. You must use the correct one.

Figure 4-15 Installing a LANdock

Page 144: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

134

P O I N T

If the notebook power switch is turnedoff it is always safe to undock. You donot have to turn on your notebook anduse the Eject PC feature.

C A U T I O N

The RJ-11 connector on the rear of yourdocking device comes with a protectivecover to keep the connector clean. Becareful to remove it before trying to makea connection. Save the cover and replaceit when the connector is not in use.

Using Your Notebook While it is Installed in the LANdockThere are a few differences you will noticebetween using your notebook in and outof the LANdock.

In the LANdock you have added capabilities:

■ In the Windows 95 Start menu there is a PC Eject choice between the Suspend modeand Shutdown selections. (Use the PC Ejectchoice to enable the undocking ofyour LifeBook.)

■ Both an external mouse and an external key-board can be connected at the same time. Besure to plug them into the correct PS/2 ports.

■ There is an additional PC Card slot.

To Remove Your Notebook from the LANdock1. From the Start menu click on Eject PC or

press the Undock button on the LANdock.

2. Wait for the Safe to Undock LED to illumi-nate, even if a message appears on yourscreen saying that you may undock.

3. Push the lever on the side of the stationbackward until the docking device connec-tors are completely clear of your notebook.

4. Very carefully lift your notebook clear ofthe Alignment pins in the bottom.

Page 145: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e sL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

135

Figure 4-16 Port Replicator Front View

Port Replicator

LevelingAlignment Foot

Alignment Notches

Docking Connector

Telephone Connector

Docking Release Lever

DockingAlignment Pins

C A U T I O N

When your notebook is mounted in the LANdock it is essentially a desktopPC not a mobile notebook. DO NOTunplug the docking device with the oper-ating system active. You may cause a lossof data and a system error when yourestart your notebook.

Page 146: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F o u r

136

PORT REPLICATORTo connect your notebook to the PortReplicator, follow the docking instructions thatcome with the Port Replicator.

Using Your Notebook While it is Installed in the Port ReplicatorThere are a few differences you will noticebetween using your notebook in and out ofthe Port Replicator.

■ Both an external mouse and an external key-board can be connected at the same time. Besure to plug them into the correct PS/2 ports.

External Monitor Port

External FloppyDisk Drive Port

Dual USBPorts

RJ-11 Jack

DC Power Jack

Serial Port

PS/2 Mouse Port

Parallel PortPS/2 Keyboard Port

Figure 4-17 Port Replicator Rear View

C A U T I O N

When your notebook is mounted in thePort Replicator it is essentially a desktopPC not a mobile notebook. DO NOTunplug the Port Replicator with the operating system active. You may causea loss of data and a system error whenyou restart your notebook.

Page 147: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gS e c t i o n F i v e

Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . 158

Emergency CD-ROMTray Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . . . 161

Restoring Your Pre-installed Softwarefrom CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Page 148: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

138

SECTION FIVETROUBLESHOOTINGThe Life Book 700 Series from Fu j i t su is s tu rdy and su bj ect to few probl ems in the fiel d .However, you may en co u n ter simple setup oropera ting probl ems that you can solve on thes po t , or probl ems with peri ph eral devi ce s ,t h a tyou can solve by rep l acing the devi ce . The infor-m a ti on in this secti on helps you isolate andre s o lve some of these stra i gh tforw a rd probl em s ,and iden tify failu res that requ i re servi ce .

IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEMIf you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complextroubleshooting:

1. Turn off your notebook using the powerswitch on the right side panel.

2. Make sure the AC adapter is pluggedinto your notebook and to an active ACpower source.

3. Make sure that any card installed in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot,thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure.

4. Make sure that any devices connected tothe external connectors are pluggedin properly. You can also disconnect suchdevices,thus eliminating them as possiblecauses of failure.

5. Turn on your notebook using the powerswitch. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it on.

6.Go through the boot sequence.

7. If the problem has not been resolved, referto the problem guide table, which follows, formore detailed troubleshooting information.(Page 139 has an index to the table.)

C A U T I O N

Do not return a failed notebook to your supplier until you have talked to a support representative.

P O I N T

If you keep notes about what you havetried, your support representative may beable to help you more quickly by givingadditional suggestions over the phone.

8. If you have tried the solutions suggested inSpecific Problems without success, contactyour support representative:toll free 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487)fax 1-901-259-5700 e-mail [email protected] Site http://www.8fujitsu.com.

Before you place the call, you should havethe following information ready so that the customer support representative can provideyou with the fastest possible solution:

■ Product name.

■ Product configuration number.

■ Product serial number.

■ Purchase date.

Page 149: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

139

■ Con d i ti ons under wh i ch the probl em occ u rred .

■ Any error messages that have occurred.

■ Hardware configuration.

■ Type of printer connected, if any.

See the Configuration Label on the bottom ofyour notebook for configuration and serialnumbers. (Refer to Figure 1–10 on page 10.)

SPECIFIC PROBLEMSUsing PC-DoctorPC-Doctor is a diagnostic program byWatergate Software, Inc. which comes pre-installed on your notebook. If your are an experienced computer user you may find it useful, however, it is intended primarily tohelp your Fujitsu support representative betterserve you. When you call for help your supportrepresentative may ask you to setup your note-book for modem operation. You will be told

what to do step by step, and then to hang upthe phone and plug your phone line intothe back of your notebook. Your supportrepresentative will then use the servicecomputer to call your notebook and performdiagnostic tests to find the nature o f yourproblem. Messages will be displayed on thescreen explaining what is being done andgiving any instructions that you need.

User Problem GuidesWhen you have problems with your notebook,try to find the symptoms under the Problemcolumn of the table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description ofcommon causes for that symptom under thecolumn Possible Cause and what,if anything,you can do to correct the condition underPossible Solution.

Remember that it helps to keep notes ofwhat you have tried and the results when youare troubleshooting.

Problem PageAudio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140CD-ROM Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Docking Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Floppy Disk Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Keyboard or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . .143Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144Modem Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145Parallel, Serial,and USB Device Problems . .145PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Shutdown and Startup Problems . . . . . . . . .152Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Miscellaneous Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Page 150: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

140

Audio Problems

There is no sound coming from 1. The volume knob is turned too low. 1. Adjust the volume control knob on the rightthe built-in speakers. side of your notebook.

2. The software volume control is set too low. 2. Adjust the sound volume control settingsin your software, both operating systemand applications.

3. Headphones are plugged into your notebook. 3. Plugging in headphones disables the built-inspeakers, remove the headphones.

4. BIOS audio settings are incorrect. 4. Set the BIOS setup utility, Multimedia Device Configuration submenu of the Advanced menu to the default values.(See pages 77-78.)

5. Software driver is not configured correctly. 5. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help.

CD-ROM Drive Problems

Notebook fails to recognize CD-ROM. 1. S h i pping card is sti ll in the C D - ROM drive tray. 1. Rem ove shipping card and rep l ace CD in tray.

2. CD-ROM is installed with label face down. 2. Open CD-ROM tray and re-install CD with proper orientation.

3. CD-ROM is not pushed down onto raised 3. Open CD-ROM tray and re - i n s t a ll CD properly.center circle of drive.

4. CD-ROM tray is not latched shut. 4. Push on the front of the CD-ROM tray untilit latches.

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Page 151: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

141

5. Setup utility is set to something other than 5. Revise BIOS settings to set the SecondaryCD-ROM or Auto for the Secondary Master correctly. (See Main menu andMaster Controller. Primary Master submenu pages 56-62 for

more information.)6. Wrong drive designator was used for 6. Verify the drive designator used by the

CD-ROM in the application. application is the same as the one used bythe operating system. When the operatingsystem is booted from a CD-ROM drivedesignations are automatically adjusted.

7. Windows CD auto insertion function 7. Start the CD from the desktop oris disabled. application software or re-enable the

Windows CD auto insertion function.(See CD-ROM Access Indicator on pages 21-22 for more information.)

The CD-ROM Access indicator on the Status 1. The Windows CD auto insertion function 1. This is normal.Indicator panel blinks at regular intervals when is active and is checking to see if a CD is You can disable this function if you wish.no CD is in the tray or the CD-ROM drive is ready to run. (See CD-ROM Access Indicator on pagesnot installed. 21-22 for more information. )

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Page 152: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

142

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Docking Problems

Notebook does not turn on when installed in 1. LANdock AC adapter is not 1. Provide power to the LAN-DockingDocking Station. plugged in. Station.

2. Notebook is not properly seated in the 2. Remove and re-dock your notebook.LANdock. and verify that the Docked LED illuminates.

Floppy Disk Drive

You cannot access your floppy disk. 1. Security is set to protect access to floppy 1. Verify your password and security settings.disk data.

2. Floppy diskis not loaded correctly. 2. Eject floppy disk, check orientation and re-insert. (See Floppy Disk Driveon pages 34-35.)

3. BIOS setup utility has D i s k e t t e 3. Revise the setup utility Main menu settings.Controller: Disabled. (See Main Menu on pages 58-60. )

4. The floppy disk drive may not be 4. Rem ove and re - i n s t a ll your floppy disk drive .properly installed. (See Mu l ti -f u n ction Bays on pa ges 117-119, or

External In s t a ll a tion of a Floppy Disk Driveon pa ge 128.)

5. You tried to write to a write protected 5. Eject the floppy disk and set it to writefloppy disk. enabled. (See page 35.)

Page 153: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

143

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Hard Drive Problems

You can not access your hard drive. 1. The setup utility is set to something other 1. Revise BIOS settings to set both Primarythan the characteristics of your internal or Master and Primary Slave correctly.optional second hard drive. (See Main Menu and Primary Master

Submenu pages 58-63 for moreinformation.) (Internal is Primary Masterand optional second is Primary Slave.)

2. The wrong drive designator was used by an 2. Verify drive designator used by applicationapplication when a bootable CD-ROM was is in use by the o perating system. When the used to start the notebook. operating system is booted from a CD-ROM,

drive designations are automatically adjusted.(See Pri m a ry Ma s ter Su b m enu on pa ges 60-63.)

3. Security is set so operating system can not 3. Verify your password and security settings.be started without a password. (See Security menu on pages 89-94.)

Keyboard or Mouse Problems

The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. 1. The notebook has gone into Suspend mode. 1. Push the Suspend/Resume button.2. Your application has locked out 2. Try to use the ErgoTrac pointing device

your keyboard. to access the Start menu and then theShutDown menu and restart the System.If this fails then turn your notebook off,wait 10 seconds or more,and then turnit on using the p ower switch.

Page 154: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

144

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

You have installed an external keyboard. 1. Your external device is not properly installed. 1. Re-install your device. (See Mouse orKeyboard on page 127.) or mouse,and it does not seem to work.

2. Your operating system software is not setup 2. Check your device and operating systemwith the correct software driver for that device. documentation and activate the proper driver.

3. Your mouse or keyboard is connected to the 3. Plug the mouse into the PS/2 Mouse portwrong PS/2 port on the LANdock. and the external keyboard or numeric

key pad into the PS/2 Keyboard port.(Figure 4-14 on page 132 and Figure 4-17 on page 136.)

You have connected an external keyboard or a 1. Your operating system software is not setup 1. Check your device and operating systemmouse and it seems to be locking up the system. with the correct software driver for that device. documentation and activate the proper driver.

2. Your system has crashed. 2. Restart your system by shutting downand/or turning off the power, waiting at least 10 seconds and then turning the power on again.

Memory Problems

Your power on screen or Main menu of the 1. Your memory upgrade module is not 1. Remove and re-install your memoryBIOS setup utility information does not show properly installed. upgrade module. (See Memory Upgrade the correct amount of installed memory. Module on pages 129-131.)

Page 155: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

145

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

2. You have a memory failure. 2. Check for Power On Self Test (POST)messages. (See pages 158-160 for possible messages and their meanings.)

Modem Problems

Messages about modem operation. 1. Messages about modem operation are 1. See your application software documenta-generated by whichever modem application tion for additional information.is in use.

Parallel, Serial,and USB Device Problems

You have installed a parallel-port device, 1. The device is not properly installed. 1. Remove and re-install the d evice.a serial-port device or a USB device. (See Parallel Port Devices on page 126,Your notebook does not recognize the device, Serial Port on Devices on page 126, or USB or the device does not seem to work properly. Devices on page 126.)

2. The device may have been installed with an 2. Close your application and restartapplication running and your notebook your notebook.doesn’t know it’s there.

3. Your software may not have the correct 3. See your software documentation andsoftware driver active. activate the correct driver.

Page 156: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

146

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

4. You may have the wrong I/O address 4. See your device documentation andselected for your device. software documentation to determine the

required I/O address.5. Your device and another device are 5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS Setup

assigned the same I/O address. Utility and your other installed hardwareand software and make sure there areno duplications.

PC Card Problems

A card inserted in the PC Card slot 1. The card is not properly installed. 1. Remove and re-install the card.does not work or is locking up the system. . (See PC Cards on pages 103-105.)

2. The card may have been installed with an 2. Close your application and application running and your notebook restart your notebook.doesn’t know it’s there.

3. Your software may not have the correct 3. See your software documentationsoftware driver active. and activate the correct driver.

4. You may have the wrong I/O address 4. See your PC Card documentation toselected for your PC Card device. determine the required I/O address.

5. Your PC Card device and another device are 5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS setupassigned the same I/O address. utility and your other installed hardware

and make sure there are no duplications.

C A U T I O N

Due to ongoing changes in USB technology and standards, not all USBdevices and/or drivers are guaranteed to work.

Page 157: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

147

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Power Failures

You turn on your notebook and 1. The installed primary battery is completely 1. When all the batteries are dead there will benothing seems to happen. discharged,there is no optional second a beep when the power switch is turned on

battery installed and there is no Power adapter and the notebook will immediately go into(AC or auto/airline) installed. Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page

29.) Check the Status Indicator panel todetermine the presence and condition ofthe batteries. (See pages 20-21.) Install the primary battery if it is not installed or a Power adapter if all batteries are dead orunavailable. (See pages 122-123 and 11-12.)

2. The primary battery is installed but is 2. When the batteries are dead there will be acompletely discharged,there is no optional beep when the power switch is turned onsecond battery installed and the Power adapter and the notebook will immediately go into(AC or auto/airline) is not plugged in properly. Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 29.)

Check the Status Indicator panel to determine the presence and condition of the batteries and adapter. (See Figures 2-3 and 2-4 on pages 20-21.) Verify that your adapteris connected correctly. (See pages 11-12.)

Page 158: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

148

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

3. The primary battery is installed but is 3. When the battery is dead there will be acompletely discharged, there is no optional beep when the power switch is turned onsecond battery installed and the Power adapter and the notebook will immediately go into(AC or auto/airline) has no power from the Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 29.)AC outlet, airplane seat jack, or the car’s Check the Status Indicator cigarette lightercigarette lighter. panel to determine the presence and condi-

tion of the batteries and adapter. (See Figures2-3 and 2-4 on pages 20-21.) Move the ACcord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the ACoutlet,if you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignitionswitch is in the On or Accessories position.

4. The primary battery is installed but is 4. When the battery is dead there will becompletely discharged, there is no optional a beep when the power switch is turnedsecond battery installed and the Power on and the notebook will immediatelyadapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. go into Dead Battery Suspend mode.

(See page 29.) Verify the cause using the Status Indicator panel to determine the presence and condition of the batteries and adapter. (See Figures 2-3 and 2-4 on pages 20-21.) Try a different Power adapter orinstall a charged optional second battery.

Page 159: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

149

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

5. Power switch is already in the On position. 5. Try the Suspend/Resume button. If that doesn’t work,slide your power switch firmlyto the front,pause 10 seconds or more and then firmly to the rear. If you shut downyour notebook from Windows 95, you arereally in a pseudo-off state,there is some power on and you can restart with the Suspend/Resume button. (See Power Offon pages 24-25.)

6. There is no battery installed and there is no 6. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify thePower adapter (AC or auto/airline) installed. presence and condition of the batteries.

(See Figure 2-3 on page 20. ) Install a Poweradapter or install a battery in one of the Multi-function bays in the front of your notebook. (See Multi-function Bay Devices on pages 97-100.) If the battery is not chargeduse a Power adapter until it is charged.

7. The primary battery is installed but is faulty, 7. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify there is no optional second battery installed the presence and condition of the batteries.and there is no Power adapter (AC or auto/ (See Figure 2-3 on page 20.) If a battery isairline) installed. indicating a short, remove that battery and

operate from another power source orreplace that battery.

Page 160: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

150

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

8. The battery or batteries are low. 8. If the batteries are dead there will be a beepwhen the power switch is turned on and the notebook will immediately go into DeadBattery Suspend mode. (See page 29.)Check the Status Indicator panel to determine the presence and condition of the –batteries. (See Figure 2-3 on page 20.) Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery.

Your notebook turns off all by itself. 1. The power management parameters are set 1. Use the keyboard or pointer and if that doesfor auto timeouts which are too short for not restore operation,push the Suspend/ your operating needs. Re sume but ton . Ch eck the Power Pa n el set -

ti n gs or close your app l i c a ti ons and go to the setup uti l i ty Power Savi n gs menu and ad just the ti m eo ut va lues to bet ter suit your opera ti on need s . (See the Power Pa n el on pa ges 40-43 and Power Menu on pa ges 95-102.)

2. You are operating on battery only and have 2. Install a Power adapter and then push theignored a low battery alarm until the batteries Suspend/Resume button. (See Low Batteryare all at the dead battery state and your machine State on page 29.)has gone into Dead Battery Suspend mode.

Page 161: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

151

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

3. You have a battery failure. 3. Verify the condition of the batteries using the Status Indicator panel (Figure 2-3 on page 20), and replace or remove anythat are shorted.

4. Your Power adapter has failed or lost 4. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and theit’s power source. outlet has power.

Your notebook won’t work on battery alone. 1. The installed batteries are dead. 1. When the batteries are dead there will be a beep when the power switch is turned onand the notebook will immediately go intoDead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 29.)Replace the battery with a charged one orinstall a Power adapter.

2. No batteries are installed. 2. Install a charged battery. (See Mu l ti - f u n cti o nBay Devi ces on pa ges 117-119.)

3. The batteries are improperly installed. 3. Verify that the batteries are properlyconnected by re-installing them. ( S e eMu l ti - f u n ction Bay Devi ces on pa ges 117-119.)

4. Your installed batteries are faulty. 4. Verify the condition of the batteries using the Status Indicator panel (Figure 2-3 on page 20), and replace or remove anythat are shorted.

Page 162: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

152

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

The batteries seem to discharge too quickly. 1. You are running an application which uses 1. Use both the primary battery and a great deal of power because of frequent hard an optional second battery and/or use a drive access or CD-ROM access, use of a Power adapter for this application when at modem PC Card or of a LAN PC Card. all possible.

2. The power savings features may be disabled. 2. Check the PowerPanel and/or setup utility settings in the Power Savings menu(see pages 40-43 and 95-98),and adjust according to your operating needs.

3. The brightness is turned all the way up. 3. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses.

4. The batteries are very old. 4. Replace the batteries.5. The batteries have been exposed to 5. Replace the batteries.

high temperatures.6. The batteries are too hot or too cold. 6. Restore the notebook to normal operating

(See Batteries on page 26.) temperature. (The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when the battery is outside its operating range.)

Shutdown and Startup Problems

The Suspend/Resume button does not work. 1. The Suspend/Resume button is disabled from 1. Enable the button from the setup utility.the Advanced submenu of the Power menu (See page 101.)of the setup utility.

Page 163: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

153

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

2. You did not hold the button in long enough. 2. Hold the button longer. This may need tobe a very long time if your application is preventing the CPU from checking forbutton pushes.

3. There may be a conflict with the 3. Close all applications, and try the application software. button again.

The system powers up, and displays 1. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility 1. Set the operating source by pressing the Escpower on information, but fails to load are not compatible with your configuration. key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or usethe operating system. the F2 key and enter the setup utility and

adjust the source settings from the Boot menu on page 103.

2. You have a secured system requiring a 2. Make sure you have the right password.password to load your operating system. Enter the setup utility and verify the

Security settings and modify them as appro-priate. (See Security Menu on pages 89-94.)

3. Internal hard drive was not detected. 3. Use the BIOS setup utility Main menu,Primary Master submenu to try to autodetect the internal hard drive.

Page 164: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

154

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

An error message is displayed on the screen 1. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected 1. See the Power On Self Test (POST) Messagesduring the notebook turn on (boot) sequence. a problem. (pages 158-160) to determine the meaning and

severity of the problem. Not all messages areerrors; some are simply status indicators.

Your notebook appears to change setup 1. BIOS setup changes were not saved when 1. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit parameters when you start it. you made them and exited the BIOS setup when exiting the BIOS setup utility.

utility returning it to previous settings.2. The BIOS CMOS hold-up battery has failed. 2. Contact your support representative for

repairs. This is not a user serviceable partbut has a normal life of 3 to 5 years.

Video Problems

The built-in display is blank 1. Something is pushing on the Closed 1. Clear the Closed Cover switch.when you turn on your notebook. Cover switch. (See Figure 1-7 on page 7.)

2. The notebook is set for an external 2. Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn keymonitor only. allows you to change your selection of where

to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will stepto the next choice. The choices, in order, arebuilt-in display only, external monitor only,both built-in display and external monitor.

Page 165: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

155

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

3. The angle of the display and the brightness 3. Move the display and the brightness controlsettings are not adequate for your until you have adequate visibility.lighting conditions.

4. The power management timeouts may be set 4. Press any key or move the pointer, if thisfor very short intervals and you failed to doesn’t work press the Suspend/Resume notice the display come on and go off again. button. (The display may be shut off

by Standby mode, Auto Suspend, orVideo Timeout.)

5. The notebook turned on with a series of beeps. 5. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a failure which does not allow the display tooperate. Contact your support representative.

The display goes blank by itself after you 1. The notebook has gone into Video timeout, 1. Use the keyboard or pointer and ifhave been using it. Standby mode, Suspend mode or Save-to-Disk that does not restore operation, push

mode because you have not used it for a the Su s pen d / Re sume but ton . You may peri od of ti m e . want to ch a n ge your Power Pa n el set ti n gs

(pa ges 40-43) or close your app l i c a ti on and go to the setup uti l i ty Power Savi n gs menu (pa ges 95-102) and ad just the ti m eo ut va lues to bet ter suit your operation needs.

2. Something is pushing on the Closed 2. Clear the Closed Cover switch.Cover switch. (See Figure 1-7 on page 7.)

Page 166: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

156

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

3. The power management timeouts may be set 3. Press any key or move the pointer,for very short intervals and you failed to notice if this doesn’t work press the the display come on and go off again. Suspend/Resume button.

The Built-in Display does not close. 1. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck 1. Remove all foreign objects frombetween the display and the keyboard. the keyboard.

The Built-in Display has bright or dark spots. 1. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, 1. This is normal; do nothing.this is normal for a large LCD display.

2. If the spots are numerous or large enough to 2. Display is faulty; contact your interfere with your operation needs. support representative.

The application display uses only a portion 1. You are running an application that does not 1. Display compression gives a clearer butof your screen and is surrounded by a dark band. support 800 x 600 pixel resolution display smaller display for applications that do not

and display compression is enabled. support 800 x 600 pixel resolution. You can fill the screen but have less resolution bychanging your display compression setting,(See Video Features Submenu of the Advanced Menu on pages 79-80.)

Page 167: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

157

You have connected an external monitor 1. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your 1. Try toggling the video destination byand it does not come on. external monitor. pressing Fn and F10 together or check your

BIOS setup and enable your external moni-tor. (See the Video Features Submenu of the Advanced Menu on pages 79-80.)

2. Your external monitor is not 2. Reinstall your device. (See External Monitor properly installed. on page 127.)

3. Your operating system software is not setup 3 Check your device and operating systemwith the correct software driver for that device. documentation and activate the proper driver.

4. Your external monitor is not compatible 4. See your monitor documentation and thewith your notebook. External Monitor Support portions of

Appendix A on pages 170-177.

Miscellaneous Problems

An error message is displayed on the screen 1. Application software often has its own 1. See your application manual and helpduring the operation of an application. set of error message displays. displays screens for more information.

Not all messages are errors; some maysimply be status.

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

Page 168: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

158

POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGESThe following is an alphabetic list of error-and-status messages that Phoenix BIOS and/or youroperating system can generate and an explana-tion of each message.Error messages aremarked with an *. Comments in italics are sug-gestions of possible actions for you to consider,or risks resulting from ignoring the message.The most common errors are marked with a #.If an error message is displayed that is not inthis list, write it down and check your operatingsystem documentation both on screen and inthe manual. If you can find no reference to themessage and its meaning is not clear, contactyour support representative for assistance.

nnnn Cache SRAM Passed Where nnnn is theamount of system cache in kilobytes success-fully tested by the Power On Self Test. (Thiscan only appear if you have an SRAM PCCard installed.)

*Diskette drive A error or Diskette driveB error Drive A: or B: is present but fails theBIOS Power On Self Test diskette tests. Check

to see that the drive is defined with the properdiskette type in the Setup Utility, (see page 58)and that the diskette drive is installed correctly,(see pages 123 and 128) . If the disk drive isproperly defined and installed, avoid using itand contact your support representative.

*Extended RAM Failed at offset:nnnnExtended memory not working or not config-ured properly. If you have an installed memoryupgrade module, verify that the module isproperly installed. If it is properly installed, youmay want to check your Windows Setup to besure it is not using unavailable memory untilyou can contact your support representative.

nnnn Extended RAM Passed Where nnnnis the amount of memory in kilobytessuccessfully tested.

*Failing Bits:nnnn The hex number nnnnis a map of the bits at the memory address (inSystem, Extended, or Shadow memory) whichfailed the memory test.Each 1 (one) in the mapindicates a failed bit. This is a serious fault that

might cause you to lose data if you continue.Contact your support representative.

*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk ControllerFailure (where x = 1-4) Fixed disk is not work-ing or not configured properly. This may meanthat the hard drive type identified in your SetupUtility does not agree with the type detected bythe Power On Self Test. Run the Setup Utilityto check for the hard drive type settings andcorrect them if necessary. If the settings areOK and the message appears when you restartthe system,there may be a serious fault whichmight cause you to lose data if you continue.Contact your support representative.

*Incorrect Drive A type – run SETUP Type offloppy drive A:not correctly identified in Setup.This means that the floppy disk drive type iden-tified in your Setup Utility does not agree withthe type detected by the Power On Self Test. Runthe Setup Utility to correct the inconsistency.

*Incorrect Drive B type – run SETUP Type offloppy drive B:not correctly identified in Setup.

Page 169: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

159

You may have to replace your keyboard but maybe able to use an external keyboard until then.Contact your support representative.

*Monitor type does not match CMOS – RunSETUP Monitor type not correctly identified inSetup. This error probably means your BIOS iscorrupted, run the Setup Utility and set all set-tings to the default conditions. If you still getthis error, contact your support representative.

#*Operating system not found Operating sys-tem cannot be located on either drive A: ordrive C:Enter the Setup Utility and see if fixeddisk and drive A:are properly identified andthat the boot sequence is set correctly. Unlessyou have changed your installation greatly, theoperating system should be on drive C:. If thesetup utility is correctly set your hard drive isprobably corrupted and your system may haveto be re-installed from your back up media.

*Parity Check 1 nnnn Parity error found in thesystem bus.BIOS attempts to locate the addressand display it on the screen. If it cannot locate

This means that the fl oppy disk drive type iden-tified in your Setup Utility does not agree withthe type detected by the Power On Self Test. Runthe Setup Utility to correct the inconsistency.

*Invalid NVRAM media type Problem withNVRAM access. In the unlikely case that yousee this message you may have some displayproblems. You can continue operating butshould contact your support representative formore information.

*Keyboard controller error The keyboard con-troller test failed. You may have to replace yourkeyboard or keyboard controller but may beable to use an external keyboard until then.Contact your support representative.

*Keyboard error Keyboard not working. Youmay have to replace your keyboard or keyboardcontroller but may be able to use an externalkeyboard until then. Contact your supportrepresentative.

*Keyboard error nn BIOS discovered a stuckkey and displays the scan code for the stuck key.

the address,it displays ????. This is a potentiallydata destroying failure. Contact your supportrepresentative.

*Parity Check 2 nnnn Parity error found in theI/O bus.BIOS attempts to locate the addressand display it on the screen. If it cannot locatethe address,it displays ????. This is a potentiallydata destroying failure. Contact your supportrepresentative.

#*Press <F1> to resume,<F2> to SETUP isdisplayed after any recoverable error message.Press the F1 key to continue the boot process or the F2 key to enter Setup and changeany settings.

#*Previous boot incomplete – Default configu-ration used Previous Power On Self Test didnot complete successfully. Power On Self Testloads default values and offers to run Setup. Ifthe failure was caused by incorrect values andthey are not corrected, the next boot will likelyfail also. If using the default settings does notallow you to complete a successful boot

Page 170: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

160

sequence, you should turn off the powerwith the Power Switch and contact yoursupport representative.

*Real time clock error Real-time clock failsBIOS test. May require board repair. Contactyour support representative.

*Shadow RAM Failed at offset:nnnn ShadowRAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block atwhich the error was detected. You are riskingdata corruption if you continue. Contact yoursupport representative.

nnnn Shadow RAM Passed Where nnnn is theamount of shadow RAM in kilobytes success-fully tested.

*System battery is dead – Replace and runSETUP The BIOS CMOS RAM memory holdup battery is dead. This is part of your BIOSand is a board mounted battery which requiresa support representative to change. You cancontinue operating but you will have to useSetup Utility default values or reconfigure yourSetup Utility every time you turn off your

notebook. This battery has an expected lifeof 2 to 3 years.

System BIOS shadowed System BIOS copied toshadow RAM.

*System CMOS checksum bad – run SETUPBIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted ormodified incorrectly, perhaps by an applicationprogram that changes data stored in BIOSmemory. Run Setup and reconfigure the system.

*System RAM Failed at offset:nnnn Systemmemory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64kblock at which the error was detected. Thismeans that there is a fault in your built-inmemory. If you continue to operate you riskcorrupting your data. Contact your supportrepresentative for repairs.

nnnn System RAM Passed Where nnnn is theamount of system memory in kilobytes success-fully tested.

*System timer error The timer test failed. Themain clock that operates the computer is faulty.Requires repair of system board. Contact yoursupport representative for repairs.

UMB upper limit segment address:nnnnDisplays the address of the upper limit ofUpper Memory Blocks,indicating releasedsegments of the BIOS memory which maybe reclaimed by a virtual memory manager.

Video BIOS shadowed Video BIOS successfullycopied to shadow RAM.

Page 171: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n gL i f e B o o k 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t s u

161

EMERGENCY CD-ROM TRAY RELEASEIf for some reason the eject button fails, youcan open the CD-ROM tray with a paper clipor similar tool inserted into the eject hole in thefar right side of the front of the tray. Straightenone side of a paper clip and push it gently intothe hole. The tray will pop out a short distance.

MODEM SETUP AND COMMANDSThe operating system and application softwarethat is factory installed detects the modemcharacteristics and provides the necessary com-mand strings to operate the modem. The inter-nal modem operation is controlled by generic

AT commands from the operating system andapplication software. The standard long formresult codes may, in some cases, be displayed onyour screen to keep you informed of the actionsof your modem. The operating system andapplication software may suppress display ofthe result codes.

Examples of result codes are:OKNO CARRIERNO DIALTONECONNECT 56000

(Connection complete at 56,000 bps.)ERRORFAXRING (This means an incoming call.)BUSYNO ANSWER

When using the internal modem with applica-tions which are not factory installed see theapplication documentation.

Figure 5-1 Emergency CD-ROM Tray Release

Page 172: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S e c t i o n F i v e

162

Recovery Directions1. Put the Recovery CD-ROM in the

CD-ROMdrive.

2.Start your notebook.

3. Set the operating system source to be theCD-ROM drive.

4. Follow the instructions on your screen.

5. When recovery is complete, remove theRecovery CD-ROM, replace it in its sleeveand store it.

6. Restart your notebook.

7. Reset your operating system source to be thehard drive,if you wish.

P O I N T

As long is there is no boot disk in theCD-ROM drive or the floppy disk driveyour notebook will boot from the harddrive, regardless of the operating systemsource setting.

Your notebook now has all of the softwareinstalled that was installed when you received itfrom the factory. You must now set up the filefor your Save-to-Disk function (see Setting UpYour Save-To-Disk File Allocation starting onpage 112), load any programs which you pur-chased and installed after you got your note-book,and restore your data files. If you did notchoose the format and recover option your datafiles will still exist. You are now ready to operate.

C A U T I O N

Remember that you must set the Bootmenu in the BIOS setup utility to CD-ROM Drive, or use the Esc key duringthe boot-up sequence to change thesetting so the BIOS loads the operatingsystem from the CD-ROM, not the harddrive. (See page 105 for ways to set theoperating system source.)

C A U T I O N

User data and user installed applicationsCAN NOT be recovered from theRecovery CD-ROM.

Page 173: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c eS e c t i o n S i x

Caring for Your Notebook. . . . . . . . . . 164

Increasing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 165

Page 174: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

■ Do not put heavy or sharp objects onthe computer.

■ If you are carrying your notebook in a brief-case, or any other carrying case,make surethat there are no objects in the case p ressingon the lid of your notebook.

■ Do not drop your notebook.

■ Clean your notebook with a damp, lint-freecloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.

■ Use a soft cloth to rem ove dust from the screen .

S e c t i o n S i x

164

SECTION SIXCARE AND MAINTENANCEIf you use your LifeBook 700 Series fromFujitsu carefully, you will increase its life andreliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the notebook and the battery packs.

CARING FOR YOUR NOTEBOOK■ The LifeBook 700 Series is a durable but

sensitive electronic device. Treat it withrespect and care.

■ Make a habit of transporting it in a suitablecarrying case.

■ Keep it away from food and beverages.

■ If you accidentally spill liquid onyour notebook:

1. Turn it off.2. Position it so that the liquid can run out.3. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer

if needed.4. If your notebook will not boot after it has

dried out,call your support representative.

■ Avoid exposure to water, sand, dust,andother environmental hazards.

■ Do not expose your notebook to directsunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140° F (60° C) maydamage your notebook.

■ Keep the covers closed on the connectors andslots when they are not in use.

Page 175: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c eL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

INCREASING BATTERY LIFETo increase battery life:

1. Power your notebook through the AC or optional auto/airline adapterwhenever possible.

2. If your notebook is running on battery powerall day, connect it to the AC adapterovernight to recharge the battery.

3. Keep bri gh tness to the lowest level com fort a bl e .

4. Set the power management for maximumbattery life.

5. Put your notebook in Suspend mode when itis turned on and you are not actually using it.

6.Limit your CD-ROM access.

7. Disable the Windows 95 CD automatic insertion function. (See page 20.)

8. Always use fully charged batteries.

CARING FOR YOUR BATTERIES

If your notebook is to be stored for a month or longer, turn the machine off and removeall Lithium ion batteries. Store your notebook and batteries separately in a cool,dry location.If you store your notebook with a batteryinstalled,the battery will discharge,and batterylife will be reduced. In addition, a faulty batterymight damage your notebook.

165

Page 176: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d G l o s s a r yA p p e n d i c e s

Appendix A Specifications . . . . . . . . . 168

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

LifeBook 770Tx Specifications . . . . . . . . 168

LifeBook 790Tx Specifications . . . . . . . . 171

Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Appendix B Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Page 177: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

168

APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONSAppendix A provides the hardware and envi-ronmental specifications and the model andpart numbers for your LifeBook 700 Series andits peripherals.

WARRANTYYour notebook is backed by a limited warrantyand includes toll-free technical support;call1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487). Check theservice kit that came with your notebook forwarranty terms and conditions.

LIFEBOOK 770TX SPECIFICATIONSMicroprocessorIntel Pentium 200MHz with MMX technology,L1 and L2 cache,PCI bus architecture,andCardBus architecture.

MemorySystem Memory32MB SDRAM.

L1 Cache Memory32KB within CPU.

L2 Cache Memory512KB Pipeline Burst SRAM.

Expansion Memory16MB, 32MB and 64MB SDRAM Modulesextend system memory up to 96MB; installablein a single DIMM (dual-in-line memory mod-ule) slot in a compartment in the bottom of thenotebook.SDRAM Modules are recommendedbut EDO RAM Modules will work.

Fujitsu product numbers:16MB SDRAM,FPCEM05.32MB SDRAM,FPCEM06.64MB SDRAM,FPCEM07.

In s t a lling an EDO RAM Module wi ll cause yo u ren ti re sys tem to opera te at slower EDO ti m i n g.

8MB EDO RAM,FPCEM01A.16MB EDO RAM,FPCEM02A.32MB EDO RAM,FPCEM03.64MB EDO RAM, Third Party Only.

BIOS Memory512KB Flash ROM.256 Bytes CMOS-RAM with back-up battery.

Video RAM2MB EDO RAM.

Mass StorageMulti-function Device BaysTwo warm-swappable.

Floppy Disk DriveOne modular 3.5" floppy disk drive which

accommodates a 1.44MB or a 720KB floppydisk, Fujitsu Model FPCFDD03.

One optional external floppy disk drive, FujitsuModel FPCFD02.

Hard DriveOne factory installed 3.2GB, 2.5" (12.7 mm)

fixed hard drive unit.One optional modular 3.2GB, 2.5" (12.7 mm)

hard drive unit, Fujitsu Model FPCHDD03.

CD-ROM DriveOne modular, factory installed,20-speed

maximum,2.5" (12.7 mm) drive, FujitsuModel FPCCD06. Simultaneous with floppy disk drive.

Page 178: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

169

Zip DriveOne optional modular 100MB, 2.5”(12.7mm)

Zip removable media drive unit,Fujitsu Model FPCZIP02.

AudioSoundBlaster-compatible 16-bit stereo

PCM/FM sound chip.Spatializer 3D-Stereo multiple speaker effect

support.Stereo headphone jack, 1 Vrms, or less,

minimum impedance 32 Ohms.Stereo line in jack, 880 mVrms or less,

minimum impedance 10K Ohms.Mono microphone jack,125 mVp-p or less,

minimum impedance 10K Ohms.Two built-in speakers,28 mm diameter

(Stereo).One built-in monaural microphone.

CommunicationInternal 56K fax/data/voice modem

(56 Kbps data/voice transmission;14.4 Kbps fax transmission,DSVD).(See page 3 for caution on modem.)

One IrDA compatible infrared port (4 Mbps).

VideoMPEG-1 video data decompression software.Zoomed Video support via PC Card Slot 1.

Device Adapter for Bay 2Device adapter for Bay 2,

Fujitsu Model FPCBYA01.

Pre-Installed SoftwareTioman ProSwap by Agaté Technologies.Microsoft Windows 95.LapLink by Traveling Software.MegaPhone by AVEO, Inc.VirusScan by McAfee Associates.Audio Rack 32 for Windows 95

by ESS Technology, Inc.SoftPEG by CompCore Multimedia Inc.PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies.

Input/Output ConnectionsOne Type III/two Type I/II PC Card slot:

PCMCIA Standard 2.1 with CardBus support; Zoomed Video support via Slot 1.

One 6-pin mini DIN PS/2 compatible connec-tor, for external keyboard, external mouse orexternal numeric keypad.

One 25-pin D-SUB two-way Centronics typeconnector for parallel input/output devices;Bi-directional,output only or ECP.

One 240-pin connector for docking devices.One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external

monitor (see Display specifications).One 9-pin D-SUB connector for RS-232C serial

input/output devices.One connector for USB (Universal Serial Bus)

input/output devices.One 25-pin special connector for external

floppy disk drive connection.One modular RJ-11 telephone line connector.One stereo headphone jack.

(See Audio specifications.)One mono microphone jack.

(See Audio specifications.)One stereo line in jack.

(See Audio specifications.)

Page 179: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

170

DisplaysBuilt-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LCDdisplay with simultaneous display capability.

Diagonal dimension: 12.1."800 x 600 pixel resolution,16M colors.640 x 480 pixel resolution,16M colors.SVGA,and VGA compatible.

External Monitor Support.SVGA,and VGA compatible CRT displays.

1024 x 768 pixel resolution, 16M colors.800 x 600 pixel resolution,16M colors.640 x 480 pixel resolution, 16M colors.

KeyboardsBuilt-in keyboard with all functions of 101 keyPS/2 compatible keyboards.

Total number of keys:86.Function keys:12, F1 through F12.Feature extension key: Fn.Windows 95 keys: 3,two Start keys and

one Application key.Key pitch:19 mm.Key stroke: 3 mm.

Built-in ErgoTrac pointing device with left and right buttons.

Built-in palmrest.

External Keyboard SupportPS/2 compatible.

External Numeric Keypad SupportPS/2 compatible.

External Mouse SupportPS/2 compatible.

Management StandardDMI 2.0/WFM 1.1.

PowerBatteriesOne modular Lithium ion battery, FujitsuModel FPCBP11. Rechargeable,10.8V, 3300mAh. Operating time of up to 3 hours. Rapidcharge (notebook off or in suspend mode) inabout three (3) hours. Standard charge (normaluse with limited CD and hard drive access) in about nine (9) hours.

C A U T I O N

Actual battery life will vary based onscreen brightness, applications, features,power management settings, batteryconditioning, and other customer preferences. CD-ROM or hard driveusage may also have a significant impacton battery life.

Dual Battery ConfigurationOperating time of up to 6 hours. Rapid charge(notebook off or in Suspend Mode) in about5 hours.Standard charge (normal use with limited CD and hard drive access) in aboutfifteen (15) hours.

AC AdapterAutosensing 100-240V AC,43W, supplying 16V DC to the Notebook, Fujitsu ModelFPCAC05 which includes an AC cable.

Optional Auto/Airline AdapterAutosensing 12/24V DC,43W supplying 16V DC to the Notebook, FujitsuModel FPCCAA02.

Page 180: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

171

Power ManagementSave-to-Disk, Suspend, Idle and Standbypower savings modes. When the battery is fullycharged the computer can remain in Suspendmode for approximately 24 hours or more.

Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configurationand Power Interface) version 1.0.Dimensionsand Weight

Overall DimensionsApproximately 11.7" x 9.7" x 2.3"(297 mm x 246 mm x 58 mm).

WeightApproximately 7.6 lbs (3.5 Kg) with floppy diskdrive and battery installed.

Environmental RequirementsTemperatureOperating: 5° to 35° C (41° to 95° F).Non-operating: –15° to 60° C (5° to 140° F).

HumidityOperating: 20% to 85%, relative,non-condensing.Non-operating;8% to 85%, relative,

non-condensing.

AltitudeOperating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum.

Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)9 kV.

Theft Prevention LockLock slot on the right side panel for use withphysical restraining security systems. The lock-ing system by Kensington is recommended.

LIFEBOOK 790TX SPECIFICATIONSMicroprocessorIntel Pentium 266MHz with MMX technology,L1 and L2 cache,PCI bus architecture,andCardBus architecture.

MemorySystem Memory32MB SDRAM.

L1 Cache Memory32KB within CPU.

L2 Cache Memory512KB Pipeline Burst SRAM.

Expansion Memory16MB, 32MB and 64MB SDRAM Modulesextend system memory up to 96MB; installablein a single DIMM (dual-in-line memory mod-ule) slot in a compartment in the bottom of thenotebook.SDRAM Modules are recommendedbut EDO RAM Modules will work.

Fujitsu product numbers:16MB SDRAM,FPCEM05.32MB SDRAM,FPCEM06.64MB SDRAM,FPCEM07.

In s t a lling an EDO RAM Module wi ll cause yo u ren ti re sys tem to opera te at slower EDO ti m i n g.

8MB EDO RAM,FPCEM01A.16MB EDO RAM,FPCEM02A.32MB EDO RAM,FPCEM03.64MB EDO RAM, Third Party Only.

BIOS Memory512KB Flash ROM.256 Bytes CMOS-RAM with back-up battery.

Video RAM2MB EDO RAM.

Page 181: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

172

Mass StorageMulti-function Device BaysTwo warm-swappable.

Floppy Disk DriveOne modular 3.5" floppy disk drive which

accommodates a 1.44MB or a 720KB floppydisk, Fujitsu Model FPCFDD03.

One optional external floppy disk drive, FujitsuModel FPCFD02.

Hard DriveOne factory installed 4.0GB, 2.5" (12.7 mm)

fixed hard drive unit.One optional modular 3.2, 2.5"

(12.7 mm) hard drive unit, Fujitsu ModelFPCHDD03.

CD-ROM DriveOne modular, factory installed,20-speed

maximum,2.5" (12.7 mm) drive, FujitsuModel FPCCD06. Simultaneous with floppydisk drive.

Zip DriveOne optional modular 100MB, 2.5”

(12.7mm) Zip removable media drive unit,Fujitsu Model.

AudioSoundBlaster-compatible 16-bit stereo

PCM/FM sound chip.Spatializer 3D-Stereo multiple speaker

effect support.Stereo headphone jack, 1 Vrms, or less,

minimum impedance 32 Ohms.Stereo line in jack,880 mVrms or less,

minimum impedance 10K Ohms.Mono microphone jack,125 mVp-p or less,

minimum impedance 10K Ohms.Two built-in speakers,28 mm diameter

(Stereo).One built-in monaural microphone.

CommunicationInternal 56K fax/data/voice modem

(56 Kbps data/voice transmission;14.4 Kbps fax transmission, DSVD).(See page 3 for caution on modem.)

One IrDA compatible infrared port (4 Mbps).

VideoMPEG-1 video data decompression software.Zoomed Video support via PC Card Slot 1.

Device Adapter for Bay 2Device adapter for Bay 2,

Fujitsu Model FPCBYA01.

Pre-Installed SoftwareTioman ProSwap by Agaté TechnologiesMicrosoft Windows 95.LapLink by Traveling Software.MegaPhone by AVEO, Inc.VirusScan by McAfee Associates.Audio Rack 32 for Windows 95

by ESS Technology, Inc.SoftPEG by CompCore Multimedia Inc.PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies.

Input/Output ConnectionsOne Type III/two Type I/II PC Card slot:

PCMCIA Standard 2.1 with CardBus support; Zoomed Video support via Slot 1.

Page 182: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

173

One 6-pin mini DIN PS/2 compatible connec-tor, for external keyboard, external mouse orexternal numeric keypad.

One 25-pin D-SUB two-way Centronics typeconnector for parallel input/output devices;Bi-directional, output only or ECP.

One 240-pin connector for docking devices.One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external

monitor (see Display specifications).One 9-pin D-SUB connector for RS-232C serial

input/output devices.One connector for USB (Universal Serial Bus)

input/output devices.One 25-pin special connector for external

floppy disk drive connection.One modular RJ-11 telephone line connector.One stereo headphone jack

(see Audio specifications).One mono microphone jack

(see Audio specifications).One stereo line in jack (see Audio specifications).

DisplaysBuilt-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LCDdisplay with simultaneous display capability.

Diagonal dimension:12.1."800 x 600 pixel resolution,16M colors.640 x 480 pixel resolution,16M colors.SVGA,and VGA compatible.

External Monitor Support.SVGA,and VGA compatible CRT displays.

1024 x 768 pixel resolution,16M colors.800 x 600 pixel resolution,16M colors.640 x 480 pixel resolution,16M colors.

KeyboardsBuilt-in keyboard with all functions of 101 keyPS/2 compatible keyboards.

Total number of keys:86.Function keys: 12, F1 through F12.Feature extension key: Fn.Windows 95 keys: 3,two Start keys and

one Application key.Key pitch: 19 mm.Key stroke: 3 mm.

Built-in ErgoTrac pointing device with left and right buttons.

Built-in palmrest.

External Keyboard SupportPS/2 compatible.

External Numeric Keypad SupportPS/2 compatible.

External Mouse SupportPS/2 compatible.

Management StandardDMI 2.0/WFM 1.1.

PowerBatteriesOne modular Lithium ion battery, FujitsuModel FPCBP11. Rechargeable,10.8V, 3300mAh. Operating time of up to 3 hours. Rapidcharge (notebook off or in suspend mode) inabout three (3) hours.Standard charge (normaluse with limited CD and hard drive access) in about nine (9) hours.

Page 183: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

174

Environmental RequirementsTemperatureOperating: 5° to 35° C (41° to 95° F).Non-operating: –15° to 60° C (5° to 140° F).

HumidityOperating: 20% to 85%, relative,non-condensing.Non-operating;8% to 85%, relative,

non-condensing.AltitudeOperating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum.

Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)9 kV.

Theft Prevention LockLock slot on the right side panel for use withphysical restraining security systems. The lock-ing system by Kensington is recommended.

Optional Auto/Airline AdapterAutosensing 12/24V DC,43W supplying 16V DC to the Notebook, FujitsuModel FPCCAA02.

Power ManagementSave-to-Disk, Suspend, Idle and Standbypower savings modes. When the battery is fullycharged the computer can remain in Suspendmode for approximately 24 hours or more.

Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configurationand Power Interface) version 1.0.

Dimensions and Weight

Overall DimensionsApproximately 11.7" x 9.7" x 2.3"(297 mm x 246 mm x 58 mm).

WeightApproximately 7.6 lbs (3.5 Kg) with floppy diskdrive and battery installed.

Dual Battery ConfigurationOperating time of up to 6 hours. Rapid charge(notebook off or in Suspend Mode) in about5 hours.Standard charge (normal use with limited CD and hard drive access) in aboutfifteen (15) hours.

AC AdapterAutosensing 100-240V AC,43W, supplying 16V DC to the Notebook, Fujitsu ModelFPCAC05 which includes an AC cable.

C A U T I O N

Actual battery life will vary based onscreen brightness, applications, features,power management settings, batteryconditioning, and other customer preferences. CD-ROM or hard driveusage may also have a significant impacton battery life.

Page 184: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

175

APPROVALSEmissionsFCC Part 15,FCC Part 68, FTZ.

SafetyUL,C-UL,CSA.

FCC CertificationSee statement at the front of this User’s Guide.

DOC (Industry Canada) CertificationSee statement at the front of this User’s Guide.

POPULAR ACCESSORIESOther accessories are available, contact your

authorized Fujitsu reseller.Optional second modular Lithium ion battery,

Fujitsu Model FPCBP11.Optional modular 3.2GB hard drive, Fujitsu

Model FPCHDD03.

LANdock, Fujitsu Model FPCDS11. TheLANdock provides connections for:

RS-232C Serial device.Parallel device.VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.

Mouse (PS/2).Keyboard (PS/2).Slot for Two Type II/one Type III PC Cards

without Zoomed Video support.Telephone line (RJ-11).10/100 Base-T Ethernet line (RJ-45).MIDI/joystick device.Two USB devices.External floppy disk drive.Stereo Headphone.Microphone.Stereo Line In.

Port Replicator, Fujitsu Model FPCPR07. ThePort Replicator provides connections for:

RS-232C Serial device.Parallel device.VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.Mouse (PS/2).Keyboard (PS/2).Telephone line (RJ-11).Two USB devices.External floppy disk drive.Microphone.Stereo Line In.

Page 185: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

176

APPENDIX B GLOSSARY

AC AdapterA device which converts the AC voltage from awall outlet to the DC voltage needed to poweryour Computer.

ACPI 1.0Advanced Configuration and Power Interfacespecification version 1.0. Conforming systemscontain BIOS support to allow next generationWindows operating systems to manage powerconsumption of system components.

Active-Matrix DisplayA type of technology for making flat-panel dis-plays which has a transistor or similar devicefor every pixel on the screen.

Auto/Airline AdapterA device which converts the DC voltage froman automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DCpower outlet to the DC voltage needed to poweryour notebook.

BIOSBasic Input-Output System.A computer pro-gram and set of default parameters stored inROM which tests and operates your computerwhen you turn it on until it lo ads your installedoperating system from disk. Information fromthe BIOS is transferred to the installed operat-ing system to provide it with information onthe configuration and status of the hardware.

BitAn abbrevi a ti on for bi n a ry digi t . A single piece ofi n form a ti on wh i ch is ei t h er a one (1) or a zero (0).

bpsAn abbreviation for bits per second. Used todescribe data transfer rates.

BootTo start-up a computer and load its operatingsystem from disk, ROM or other storage mediainto RAM.

BusAn electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your computer.

Byte8 bits of parallel binary information.

Cache MemoryA block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access thanyour system RAM and used in specially struc-tured ways to make your overall data handlingtime faster.

CardBusA faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interfacewhich offers performance similar to the 32-bitPCI architecture.

CD-ROMCompact disc read only memory. This is a formof digital data storage which is read opticallywith a laser rather than a magnetic head. Atypical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB ofdata and is not subject to heads crashing intothe surface and destroying the data when thereis a failure nor to wear from reading.

Page 186: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

177

CHS TranslationCylinder, head and sector translation.Conversion of hard drive access addressing tothe cylinder, head and sector form. The termi-nology is historical left from the days when datawas stored on a series of cylindrical drums. Thehead designates the reading device,similar tothe head on a cassette recorder only mountedon a movable arm. Another addressing method is LBA.

CMOS RAMComplementary metal oxide semiconductorrandom access memory. This is a technology formanufacturing random access memory whichrequires very low levels of power to operate.

COM PortAbbreviation for communication port.This is your serial interface connection.

CommandAn instruction which you give your operatingsystem. Example: run a particular applicationor format a floppy disk.

DiskA spinning platter of magnetic data storagemedia. If the platter is very stiff it is a harddrive,if it is highly flexible it is a floppy disk,if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter it is commonly called a diskette.

Disk DriveThe hardware which spins the disk and has theheads and control circuitry for reading andwriting the data on the disk.

DisketteA floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter.

DMADirect Memory Access.Special circuitry formemory to memory transfers of data which donot require CPU action.

DMIDesktop Management Interface.A standardthat provides PC management applicationswith a common method of locally or remotelyquerying and configuring PC computersystems,hardware and software components,and peripherals.

ConfigurationThe combination of hardware and software thatmakes up your system and how it is allocat edfor use.

CRTCathode Ray Tube.A display device which usesa beam of electronic particles striking a lumi-nescent screen. It produces a visual image byvarying the position and intensity of the beam.

DataThe information a system stores and processes.

DCDirect current.A voltage or current that doesnot fluctuate periodically with time.

Default ValueA preprogrammed value to be used if you fail toset your own.

DIMMDual-in-line memory module.

Page 187: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

178

DOSDisk Operating System (MS-DOS is a MicrosoftDisk Operating System).

DriverA computer program which converts applica-tion and operating system commands to exter-nal devices into the exact form required bya specific brand and model of device in orderto produce the desired results from that particular equipment.

ECPExtended Capability Port.A set of standards forhigh speed data communication and intercon-nection between electronic devices.

ESDElectro-Static Discharge. The sudden dischargeof electricity from a static charge which hasbuilt-up slowly. Example: the shock you getfrom a doorknob on a dry day or the sparksyou get from brushing hair on a dry day.

Extended MemoryAll memory more than the 640KB recognizedby MS-DOS as system memory.

FCCFederal Communication Commission.

Floppy DiskA spinning platter of magnetic data storagemedia which is highly flexible.

GBGigabyte.

Gigabyte1,073,741,824 bytes (2 raised to the thirtieth power).

Hard driveA spinning platter of magnetic data storagemedia where the platter is very stiff.

HexadecimalA decimal notation for the value of a 4 bit binary number. (0-9,A, B, C, D, E,F) Example:2F in hexadecimal = 00101111 in binary = 47in decimal.

I/OInput/Output.Data entering and leaving yourcomputer in electronic form.

I/O PortThe connector and associated control circuitsfor data entering and leaving your computerin electronic form.

IDEIntelligent Drive Electronics.A type of controlinterface for a hard drive which is inside thehard drive unit.

ImpedanceThe amount of resistance to the flow ofelectric current.

InfraredLight just beyond the red portion of the visiblelight spectrum which is invisible to humans.

IRAn abbreviation for infrared.

Page 188: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

179

IrDAInfrared Data Association. An organizationwhich produces standards for communicationusing infrared as the carrier.

IRQInterrupt Request. An acronym for the hard-ware signal to the CPU that an external eventhas occurred which needs to be processed.

KB Kilobyte.

Kilobyte1,024 bytes (2 raised to the tenth power).

LANLocal Area Network. An interconnection ofcomputers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves.

LBALogical Block Addressing. A method of locatingdata stored on a disk.

LCDLiquid Crystal Display. A type of display whichmakes images by controlling the orientation ofcrystals in a crystalline liquid.

Lithium ion BatteryA type of rechargeable battery which has a highpower-time life for its size and is not subject tothe memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries.

LPT PortLine Printer Port.A way of referring to parallelinterface ports because historically line printerswere the first and latter the most commondevice connected to parallel ports.

MBMegabyte.

Megabyte1,048,576 bytes (2 raised to the twentieth power).

Megahertz1,000,000 cycles per second.

MemoryA repository for data and applications which isreadily accessible to your computer CPU.

MHzMegahertz.

MIDIMusical Instrument Digital Interface.A stan-dard communication protocol for exchange ofinformation between computers and soundproducers such as synthesizers.

ModemA contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator.The equipment which connects a computer orother data terminal to a communication line.

MMX TechnologyMMX technology is an Intel processor enhance-ment that improves multimedia and communi-cation applications. The Pentium processor withMMX technology boasts three primary architec-tural design enhancements: 57 powerful newinstructions specifically designed to manipulate

Page 189: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

180

PALPhase Alternation by Line. The standard forcolor television in Western Europe and most ofAsia and Africa.

Parallel PortA connection to another device through whichdata is transferred as a block of bits simultane-ously with a wire for each bit in the blo ck andwith other wires only for control of the devicenot for transfer of data.

PartitionA block of space on a hard drive which is setaside and made to appear to the operating sys-tem as if it were a separate disk,and addressedby the operating system accordingly.

PCMCIAPCMCIA is a trademark of the PersonalComputer Memory Card InternationalAssociation. The Personal Computer MemoryCard International Association is an organiza-tion that sets standards for add-in cards forpersonal computers.

Peripheral DeviceA piece of equipment which performs a specificfunction associated with but not integral toa computer. Examples: a printer, a modem,a CD-ROM.

PIOParallel Input/Output.

Pitch (keyboard)The distance between the centers of the letterkeys of a keyboard.

PixelThe smallest element of a display, a dot of coloron your display screen. The more pixels perarea the clearer your image will appear.

POSTPower On Sel f Te s t . A program wh i ch is part ofthe BIOS wh i ch ch ecks the con fig u ra ti on andopera ting con d i ti on of your hardw a re wh en everpower is app l i ed to your Com p uter. S t a tus anderror messages may be displayed before the oper-a ting sys tem is loaded . If the sel f test detects fail-u res that are so serious that opera ti on can notcon ti nu e , the opera ting sys tem wi ll not be loaded .

and process video, audio and graphical data effi-ciently; Single Instruction Multiple Data (SIMD)enabling one instruction to perform the samefunction on multiple pieces of data; and moreL1 cache for a total of 32KB.

MonauralA system using one channel to process soundfrom all sources.

MPU-401A standard for MIDI interfaces and connectors.

NTSCNational TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception forthe USA.

Operating SystemA group of control programs that convertapplication commands,including driverprograms,into the exact form required by aspecific brand and model of microprocessorin order to produce the desired results fromthat particular equipment.

Page 190: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e sL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

181

Serial PortA connection to another device through whichdata is transferred one bit at a time on a singlewire with any other wires only for control ofthe device not for transfer of data.

Shadow RAMA technique of copying data or applicationsstored in ROM (Read Only Memory) into RAM(Random Access Memory) for access duringactual operation. RAM is much faster to accessthan ROM, however ROM contents are not lostwhen power is removed.Shadowing allowspermanently stored information to berapidly accessed.

SRAMStatic random access memory. A specific tech-nology of making RAM which does not requireperiodic data refreshing.

Status IndicatorA display which reports the condition of someportion of your hardware.On your Computerthis is an LCD screen just above the keyboard.

ProgramAn integrated set of coded commands to yourcomputers telling your hardware what to doand how and when to do it.

PS/2An IBM series of personal computers whichestablished a number of standards for con-necting external devices such as keyboards and monitors.

RAMRandom Access Memory. A hardware compo-nent of your computer that holds binary infor-mation (both program and data) as long as ithas the proper power applied to it.

RAM ModuleA printed circuit card with memory and associ-ated circuitry which allows the user to addadditional memory to the computer withoutspecial tools.

ResetThe act of reloading the operating system.A reset erases all information stored in RAM.

RestartSee Reset.

ResumeTo proceed after interruption. In yourComputer this refers to returning to activeoperation after having been in one of the suspension states.

ROMRead Only Memory. A form of memory inwhich information is stored by physically alter-ing the material.Data stored in this way can notbe changed by your Computer and does notrequire power to maintain it.

SCSISmall Computer Systems Interface (pronouncedscuzzy). An American National StandardsInstitute (ANSI) standard for connecting multiple (up to 7) high speed paralleldevices to a computer.

SDRAMSy n ch ronous Dynamic Ra n dom Access Mem ory.

Page 191: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

A p p e n d i c e s

182

Stereo (audio)A system using two channels to process soundfrom two different sources.

Stroke (keyboard)The amount of travel of a key when it is pressedfrom resting to fully depressed.

SuspendTo make inoperative for a period of time. Yournotebook uses various suspension states toreduce power consumption and prolong thecharge of your battery.

SVGASuper VGA.

S-VideoSuper Video. A component video system fordriving a TV or computer monitor.

System ClockAn oscillator of fixed precise frequency whichsynchronizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date.

TFTThin Film Transistor – A technology for flatdisplay panels which uses a thin film matrix oftransistors to control each pixel of the displayscreen individually.

ULUnderwriters Laboratories – An independentorganization that tests and certifies the electri-cal safety of devices.

VGAVideo Graphics Array. A video display standardoriginally introduced by IBM with the PS/2series of personal computers.

VRAMVideo Random Access Memory. A memorydedicated to video display data and control.

Write ProtectPrevent alteration of the binary state of all bitsin a storage media. Example: all informationon a device such as a floppy diskette;a blockof space in a storage media such as a partitionof a hard drive;a file or directory of floppydiskette or hard drive.

XGAExtended VGA.

Zip DriveA 100MB read/write removable media disk drive.

Zoomed VideoA PC Card port which allows notebook PCs to deliver full screen broadcast quality videothrough third party PC Cards, including TV tuners, video capture,and MPEG full-motion video.

Page 192: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

Page 193: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

184

3D-Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,49, 169,172

ACadapter . . . . . . . . . 2-3,8,11-13,20-21,

24-29,128,142,170,174,176

indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21

Access indicators . . . . . . . . . . 21,23-24,39

Active-Matrix display . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Adjustment feet . . . . . . 10-11,19,36-37,132

Advanced Menu . . . . . . 48,53,67-70, 72-74,76,78,80, 82,84-8587-88,140,156-157

Applications . . . . . . . 5,12,16,19,22,25,27,38,47,113,126, 128,

140, 150,153, 156,161,170,174,177,179,181

Arrow icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Audio functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,77

Auto suspend timeout . . . . . . . . . . 97,100

Automatic insertion function . . . . 22,37,165

Batterybridge battery . . . . . . . . . . 5,26-27,122faulty battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27level indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . 21,28-29life . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,27, 41-43,100,

163,165,170,174power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,12,40-41

Bi-directional . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,169,173

BIOSsetup utility . . . . . . . 7,12-13,38-42,44,

46,48, 53-55,57,70,91, 106,140,144,

153-154,161

Block addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,179

Bootbooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13,55, 64,76,104CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55,64,143device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55,104-106sector protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53-54,64, 138,

153-154,159

Brightness . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 18,27,38, 152,155,165, 170,174

Cache memory. . . . . . . . . 65,168, 171,176

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

CapsLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,20,23

CardBus. . . . . . . 124,168-169, 171-172,176

CD automatic insertion function. . . 22,37,165player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-49

CD-ROMaccess . . . . . . . . . . 21-22, 141,152,165drive . . . . . . . 2,4,7-8,17,19-22,26-27,

36-37, 50-51,55,62, 106,116-118,120-121,139-141

143,161-162,168,172holder tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Charging indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,28

Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

CHS translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Page 194: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e xL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

185

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 148,176

Closed cover switch . . . . . . . . 6-7,154-155

CMOS RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,177

COM port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,177

Communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,67,80

Conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,13

Configuration label . . . . . . . . . . 10-11,139

Control panel . . . . . 22, 31,34,38-39,46-47,49,51-52,58,125

CPU . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,96-97,102, 108,153, 168,171, 176-177,179

CRT. . . . . . . . . . . 10, 67,80,170,173,177

Cursor . . . . . . 5,7,13,30-33,40,42, 51,57,66,76, 88,94,101,106,118

Custom toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Data security . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 54-56,89

Date . . . . . . . . . 54-55,58-59,108, 138,182

DC power . . . . . . . . 8,11-12,132, 136,176

Dead batteryalarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29suspend mode . . . . . 29, 147-148,150-151warning condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Default value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Device adapter . . . . . . . 2-3, 8,34,117,120,122-123,169,172

Digital PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,10,47,127

DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,168,171,177

Diskdiskette . . . . . . . 50,52,59,92,106,118,

142,158, 177,182drive. . . . . . . . . . . 50,52,106,118,158errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Displaycompression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156panel . . . . . . . . . . 6-7,17-18,23-25,33,

67, 102,127

DMA . . . . . . . . . . . 63,67,70, 73,78,177

DMA channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,73,78

Dockingport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10, 116,133station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,132,142

Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,41,49

Drive designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Driver . . . . . . . . 140, 144-146,157, 178,180

DSVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,169,172

ECP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,169,173,178

ECP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Electro-static discharge. . . . . . . . . 130-131,171,174,178

Page 195: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

186

ErgoTrac . . . . . . . . . 5,7,13-14,17,30-33,43-44,76,143, 170,173

Error message . . . . . . . . . 13,24,45, 52,56,154,157-159

ESD . . . . . . . . . . . 130-131,171, 174,178

Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,175

Exit menu . . . . . . . . . . . 53,57,66, 88,94,101, 106,109-111

Extended memory . . . . . . . 60,131, 158,178

External floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . 8-9, 34,52, 54,74,116, 123,

128, 132,136, 168-169,172-173,175

External monitor. . . . . . . . . 5,9-10,33,55,115-116,127, 132,136,154,157, 169-170,173

F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,56-57,159, 170,173

F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,57,127, 154,157

F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,54-56,131, 153,159

F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,57

F9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 15,43,47,49, 124,138,161, 169,172

FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,178

Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11,19,36-37,132, 171,174

File transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,49

Fixed disk . . . . . . . . . . . . 92-93,158-159

Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . 2-4,7-9, 17,20,23-24, 34-36,50-52,54,59,74,115-117,123,128, 132,

136, 139,142,158-159,162,168-169,171-175

drive access indicator . . . . . . . . . 23,35format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,55,64

Fn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33, 55,127, 154,157, 170,173

Function keys . . . . . . . . . . 32-33,170,173

Gigabyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Half duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 43,46,62-64,96, 100,121

Hard disk timeout . . . . . . . . . . 46,96,100

Hard driveaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,46, 170,

173-174,177access indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,64

Hardware data security . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Hardware security passwords . . . . . . . . . 13

Hardware volume control . . . . . . . . . 34,49

Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,176-177

Headphones . . . . . . . . 9, 115-116,126,140

Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,77,178

Page 196: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e xL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

187

Icon. . . . . . . . . 15,21-22,26,28,31, 40,46,50-52,58,118,152

IDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,74, 124,178

Idle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,96, 100,102

Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,172,178

Inactivity shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Inactivity suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,9-10, 17,47-50,169,172,178-179

Internal hard drive . . . . . . 22,38,40, 43,45,64, 92,112-113,153

Internal modem . . . . . . . 4,9-10,17, 38,47,49,82,116,127,161

Interrupt level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

IrDA . . . . . . . . . 5,10, 47,72,169, 172,179

IRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . 71-74,78,82-84,179

joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 77-78,132,175

K56flex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

KB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 108,179

Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7,9,11, 17,19,23-24,30,32-33,39,46,50,68,75-76,90,115-116,127,132-134,136,139,143-144,150,155-156,159,169-170,

173,175,180-182

Kilobyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Label . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11,15,34,37, 125,139-140

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,28,124, 152,179

LANdock . . . . . . . . . . . 115,131-135, 142,144,175

LBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 177,179

LBA mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,102, 156,170,173,179,181

License agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Lithium ion battery . . . . . . . . . see battery

Low battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,150

LPT port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,179

Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . 53,55-56,58-61,65-66,131,141-144,153

Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Maximum battery life . . . . . . 18,41-42,165

Maximum capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Maximum performance . . . . . . . . . . 41-42

MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-60,108, 131,179

Megabyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Megahertz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Page 197: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

188

Memorycache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,65-66capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . 11,34,129-131upgrade compartment . . . . . . 10-11,129upgrade module . . . . . . . . . 11,45,112,

115-116,129-132, 144,158

MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,179

Microphone . . . . . . . . 5-9,34,49, 115-116,126,169,172-173,175

MIDI . . . . . . . . . 49,68,132, 175,179-180

MMX technology . . . . . . . . 4, 168,171,179

Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,9-10,15,17,26,38, 41,43,46-47,49-50,

82,99,116,124,127, 137,139, 145,152, 161,169,

172,179-180

Monaural. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,172,180

Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,9-10, 33,55,115-116,127,132, 136,154, 157,159, 169-170,

173, 175,182

Mono microphone . 5, 9,116,126, 169,172-173

Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . 5,9,30-33,68,75-76,90,102, 115-116, 127,

132-134,136,139,143-144,169-170,

173,175

Mouse cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,76

MPEG file player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

MPEG-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,169,172

MPU-401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Multi-function bay . . . . . . . 2-3,5-8,10-11,20,28, 34,50,52,55, 115,

117-123, 149,151

Multi-sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Multimedia device . . . . . . 48,68,77-78,140

NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Numeric keypad . . . . . . . . 9,23,32-33,116,169-170,173

NumLk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,20,23,33

NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Operating system. . . . . . . . 5, 12-13,15-16,24-25, 34-35,38-39,46,

53-56,58,68,92,94,103-106,110, 113,121,

135-136,140-141, 143-144,153,157-159,161-162,

176-178,180-181

Output only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 169,173

PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10, 67,73-74,115-116,126,132,

136,145,180

Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 180,182

Password . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13,56,90-93,143,153

Password on boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,92

Page 198: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e xL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

189

PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,7-8, 20,23-24,40, 46,49,99, 116,124-125, 132,

134, 139,146, 152,158,169,172, 176,182

PC Card access indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 23

PC-Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,48,139

PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,172,180

Peripheral device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 177,179

PHDISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,112-113

PIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,180

Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 173,180

Pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,80,156, 170,173,176,180,182

Plug & Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67-68

Pointing device . . . . . . 5-7,14, 17,30-31,33,43-44,76,143, 170,173

Port replicator . . . . . . . . . 10,115, 132-133,135-136,175

POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,54,56, 62,92,131,145, 154-155,180

Poweradapter . . . . . . . . . . . 20,27,29, 41,43,

122,129,147-152indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,29,39management . . . . . . . . . 5,7,17,26-27,

29, 38-43,46,53-55,90,92, 95,150, 155-156,

165, 170-171,174On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . 24,54,56,92,

104,131, 137,145,154-155,158-159,180

savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,38-44,46,57,96,100, 150,

152,155,171,174source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,29,44, 138,

149,151

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,8-9,19-21,23-26,29,43,52,54, 90,98,

126, 129,131, 133-134,138,143,147-151,160

PowerPanel . . . . . 5,28,38-44,46,48, 55,95,150, 152,155, 169,172

PowerPanel toolbar . . . . . . . . 28, 40-42,44

Pre-installed software. . . . 5,13, 15-17,38,48,137,169,172

Presentation profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Product code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Program . . . . . . . . . 42,48,50, 55-56,139,160,176, 178,180-181

Quiet boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

RAM . . . . . . 4,124,131, 158,160, 168,171,176-177,181

Real time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Recovery CD-ROM. . . . . . 2,15,38,161-162

Page 199: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

190

Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2,15

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . 13,54-55,86, 162,181

Restart . . . . . . . . . 15,22,25,34,44,46-47,52,54,56,90, 112-113,135-136,143-146, 149,

158, 162,181

Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7,19,21, 25,29,39-40,43-46, 50-52,90,92,

98-99,102, 119,133,143,149-150,152,155-156, 159,181

Resume on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

RJ-11 . . . . . . . . . . . 2,9-10,116,127, 132,134, 136,169, 173,175

RJ-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,175

ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,171, 176,181

S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Save-to-disk file allocation . . . . . . . . 38,45,53, 112,162

Save-to-disk mode . . . . . . . . . . 19,39-40,43-45,92,98-99

Scr Lk Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,181

SDRAM . . . . . . . . 4,108, 129,168, 171,181

Second lithium ion battery . . 4,12,20, 24,26,28,116

Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-63

Security . . . . . . . . 12-13,53-57,89-94,127,142-143,153, 171,174

Security menu . . . . . . . . . 12, 53,89,91-94,143,153

Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10, 72-73,102,115-116,126,132,

136,145,181

Setup utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see BIOS

Shadow RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,181

Shortcut Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Shorted batteries . . . . . . . . . . . see Battery

Shutdown . . . . . . . . . 15,25-26,29, 52,54,125, 134,139, 143,152

Software data security . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Software security feature . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Software volume control . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Speaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,8-9,169,172

Speakerphone . . . . . . . . 5,34,43, 47,49-50

SRAM . . . . . . . 116,124, 158,168, 171,181

Standbymode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,46,155timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,100

Start menu. . . . . . . . . 15,26,33,42,44,48,54, 113,123, 134,143

Status indicator. . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 17,19-20,26-29,39,98, 147-152,181

Page 200: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e xL i f e B o ok 7 0 0 S e r i e s f r om F u j i t su

191

Stereoheadphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126line in . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,8-9, 115-116,

126,169,172-173,175

Supervisor password . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-92

Support representative . . . . . . . . 11, 27,45,90, 122,138-139,154-156,

158-160,164

Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7,12,19, 21,23,25-29,38-41,43-46,50-52,

90, 92,97-100,102, 118-119,121-123, 125,132-134, 143,147-152,155-156,170-171,

173-174,182

Suspend mode . . . . . . . 7,12, 19,23,26-29,38-40, 43-44,50-51,97,

99,102, 118-119,121-123, 125,132,134,143,147-148,150-151,

155,170-171,173-174

SVGA . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 170,173, 175,182

System battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

System clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

System date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-59

System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,135-136

System memory . . . . . . . . . . 11,43-45,60,97-99,130-131, 160,

168, 171,178

System time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-59

System timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Telephone . . . . . . . . . 5,9,15,99, 115-116,127,131,135,169,173,175

TFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,170, 173,182

Theft prevention lock . . . 8,115,127,171,174

Tilt adjustment feet . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15,24,26,28,31,33,37-38,44-45,52,54-55,

58-59,96-97,99,118,121-123,127,130, 133-134,136, 153-155,

160, 164,170, 173-174,176-177,181-182

Transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 24,56, 132,137-139,141, 143,145,147,149,151,153, 155,

157, 159,161

Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,182

UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,182

Unauthorized access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Universal serial bus . . . . . . . 8,116, 169,173

USBdevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,139,145port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,116,126

User input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-97

User password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

User registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Page 201: COPYRIGHTsolutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/pdf/usermanuals/700...The telephone number to which the notebook is connected. 2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment

I n d e x

192

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

VGA . . . . . . . . . 10, 169-170,173,175,182

Video . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,33, 41-42,44,46,48,68,79-80,96, 100-102,

116,124,127, 139,154-157, 160,168-169, 171-172,175, 180,182

Video timeout . . . . . 42, 46,96,100,102,155

Virus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,14,48

Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,47,49, 169,172

VRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Windows . . . . . . . . . . 2,5,7,13-16,19-20,22,24-26,31-33,38-40,42-48,

50-52,54,58,87,95,118,123,125-126,134,141,149,158,165,169-170,

172-173,176

Windows setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Windows taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Write protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,92,182

XGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,182

Zip drive . . . . . 4,7-8,20,22, 50-51,116-117,123,169, 172,182

Zoomed video . . . . . . . . . 5,116, 124,169,172,175,182